Download: Mirror Download [FCC.gov] Document ID 1106379 Application ID Dha8Uy0hwvN6mgEhP/XAqw== Document Description User Manual Part 2 of 2 Short Term Confidential No Permanent Confidential No Supercede No Document Type User Manual Display Format Adobe Acrobat PDF - pdf Filesize 281.41kB (3517663 bits) Date Submitted 2009-05-06 00:00:00 Date Available 2009-06-22 00:00:00 Creation Date 2009-04-24 13:38:10 Producing Software Acrobat Distiller 8.0.0 (Windows) Document Lastmod 2009-04-24 13:40:11 Document Title 000.P-09A.book Document Creator FrameMaker 7.2 Document Author: Administrator
Information
Check/Cancel the Set Program
Music&Video Channel displaySet program
Follow the instructions on the display.
You can check or cancel the set program. For details, refer to âMobile Phone
Userâs Guide [i-mode] FOMA versionâ.
Information
Even if the setting of a program is canceled, My Menu is not deleted.
Obtain a Program Manually
â
â appears on the desktop when the automatic program acquisition
fails or the program is not updated even after the program distribution
date. When the automatic acquisition fails, you can manually obtain the
program.
Music&Video Channel displaySelect a programYES
For a partially obtained program, select âPlayâ to play it back.
For a program which has not been updated, select âPlayâ to play it back.
See page 194 when data files are stored to the maximum.
Information
When obtaining of a program is suspended, the part of the program obtained up to
that point is saved. To obtain remaining part, you can manually obtain it except in
some time zones. When a program has been updated or switched to another
program, obtaining starts not from the suspended point but from the beginning.
You cannot re-obtain the program whose playable deadline has expired. Such a
program cannot be updated until the next distribution date.
You may not be able to manually obtain programs depending on the time zone.
251
Music
To set programs, you need to register the site which offers Music&Video Channel
programs to your My Menu. (See page 179)
If you have not subscribed to Music&Video Channel, select âAbout this serviceâ to see
the Music&Video Channel introduction page.
When the programs could not be obtained due to âpower offâ or âlow batteryâ at the
start time of program obtaining, re-obtaining is performed at night of the following day.
It may take a time to obtain programs, so fully charge the battery and operate in the
good radio wave conditions.
You cannot perform the setting operation and automatic obtaining of the program
selected on the Music&Video Channel display or the program in use.
When you cancel Music&Video Channel, the programs other than those moved by
âMove programâ are deleted.
If you insert a UIM which is different from the one you used to set programs, programs
cannot be automatically obtained. Set the programs again from the Music&Video
Channel display.
When you select a service menu for Music&Video Channel, the message âConfirm
set up information?â appears. If you select âYESâ, the programs that have been
distributed might be deleted. However, they will not be deleted while the distribution is
set to be halted.
If you insert the UIM of the FOMA terminal that you have been set for programs into
another Music&Video Channel compatible FOMA terminal, the programs cannot be
obtained automatically. Select âSet programâ again from the Music&Video Channel
display to automatically update the program setting on the FOMA terminal, then the
programs can be obtained automatically.
Playing/Operating Programs
You can enjoy playing back programs in stereo sound by connecting to the Stereo
Earphone Set (option). Also, you can enjoy playing back programs wirelessly by using
a commercial Bluetooth device. (See page 400)
Music
mMUSICMusic&Video Channel
Select a program.
â
â is displayed while Music&Video Channel is
activated, and â
â is displayed when the program
shifts to pause state during Play Background.
When a program is highlighted, the next distribution
date is displayed under the program name. It is not
displayed when the program distribution is suspended.
It might not be displayed when the automatic program
obtaining fails.
When information of the previously played program
exists, playback starts from the position and/or in the
Music&Video
mode accordingly.
Channel display
Highlight a program and press l(
); then the
Chapter list is displayed.
Highlight a program and press m(
) to connect to the URL of the
program URL information.
The images on the right are displayed
when you cannot display a preview
image:
Obtaining Unplayable No preview
program
image
images
When you press h during playback or pause, playing back program ends.
Operate Music&Video Channel from Data Box
You can play back programs also from Data Box. From Data Box, you can
play back currently distributed programs as well as the programs that
have been distributed in the past and moved to the âSaved programâ.
252
mData boxMusic&Video Channel
Downloaded program or Saved program
Select a program.
You can switch display
format each time you press
c(
) from the
Program list.
Program Folder list
Program list
â About Music&Video Channel Playback display
âŚProgram image or program video
(When no images are stored, an animation
appears.)
âŚChapter number/Number of chapters
âŚChapter name/Artist name
âŚProgram name
âŚPlayback state
âŚPlayback time/Total playback time
âŚPlay mode (No indication for âNormalâ)
: Repeat
âŚEqualizer
: Normal
: H.BASS2
: H.BASS1
: Train
âŚStereo/Monaural
: Stereo
: Monaural
When the FOMA terminal
is closed
âŚListening (No indication for âOFFâ)
: Surround
: Natur1
: Natur2
âŚRemaster (No indication for âOFFâ)
: ON
âŚIcon of Bluetooth connection (No indication for not connected)
: Being connected
âŚSound volume
â Operation while playing back a Music&Video Channel program
Operation
Key operation
Halt
l(
Pause
Oo(
Oo(
Sound volume
adjustment
Operation
Equalizer
) to play back
Bo or >
âť You cannot operate during pause.
From the Music&Video Channel Playback display, you can do the following
operations by using the switch of an earphone/microphone (option):
Operation
Press once.
To play back, press again.
Replay next
chapter
Press twice in succession.
Replay previous
chapter
Press three times in succession.
When playback time is over three seconds or no previous
chapter is found, you go back to the beginning of the file.
Search
(fast forward)âť
Press and hold Vo.
Search
(fast rewind)âť
Press and hold Co.
Connect to site
m(
Switch vertical
display/horizontal
display
c(
Each time of pressing switches in order of playback on the
vertical display â playback on the horizontal display fitted to
the display size â playback on the enlarged full display.
â Icons on the Music&Video Channel display/the Program list
The icons on the Music&Video Channel display indicate the download status.
Icon
Description
Music
Co or <(for at least one second)
When playback time is over three seconds or no previous
chapter is found, you go back to the beginning of the file.
Switch operation
Pause
Replay next chapter Vo or >(for at least one second)
Replay previous
chapter
Key operation
Each time of pressing switches in order of âNormalâ â
âH.BASS1â â âH.BASS2â â âTrainâ.
Successfully obtained program
Broken program
Partially obtained program or unsuccessfully obtained program
Display next image 3
Display previous image 1
Remaster
Each time of pressing switches between âONâ and âOFFâ.
Listening
Each time of pressing switches in order of âOFFâ â âSurroundâ
â âNatur1â â âNatur2â.
â
â is added to the newly obtained program.
Some programs have restrictions on the number of playbacks, playable deadline, or
playback period. â â is added to the icon of the program with playback restrictions and
â â is added to the icon of the program with restrictions expired. You can check the
playback restrictions for the program by âProgram infoâ.
Some programs have restrictions on operation. â â is added to the icon of the
program with operation restrictions.
Depending on the program, its playable time zone is fixed. â â is added to the icon of
the program with time zone restrictions. The time follows the time information obtained
from the network.
When obtaining a periodically-updated program fails, â â appears to tell the program
has not been updated. â â disappears when obtaining the program starts.
The file restriction is set to all the Music&Video Channel programs. See page 225 for
the file restrictions.
253
Music
Information
The information of the previously played program is erased if you do the following
operations:
シ When you turn on/off the FOMA terminal
シ When you update the program
シ When you delete or move the previously played program
If you try to play back a program with a low battery, the confirmation display appears
asking whether to play it back. The battery alert tone sounds regardless of the setting
of âKeypad soundâ. When the battery becomes low during playback (including during
Play Background), the playback pauses, and the confirmation display appears asking
whether to end the playback.
In the following cases, playback pauses and resumes after you finish each operation:
シ When you make/receive a voice call or videophone call
シ When you receive a mail message or Message R/F while âReceiving displayâ is set
to âAlarm preferredâ or the Stand-by display is shown
シ When an alarm of âAlarmâ, âScheduleâ, âToDoâ, âTV timerâ or âTimer recordingâ
sounds
Depending on the function which occurred, the confirmation display might appear
asking whether to end the Music&Video Channel program.
If a black display appears after you play back a program with time zone restrictions,
playback starts at the next playable time zone.
If you playback a program in countries other than Japan, the playable deadline might
expire before or after the displayed deadline.
On the full display, you cannot play back the audio-only music programs and video
programs of QCIF (176 x 144) or smaller.
Function Menu of Music&Video Channel Display/Program
Folder List/Program List
Chapter list
254
You can display the list of chapters set for the program. Select
a chapter to play back the selected chapter and afterward.
Press i(
) and select âChapter infoâ to display the
information about the chapter title, playback time, etc.
Play mode setting
Normal or Repeat
Normal . . .Plays back the program once in the order of the
chapters.
Repeat. . . .Plays back the program repeatedly in the order of
the chapters.
Program info
You can display the program title, distribution source,
playback restrictions, etc.
Move program
Programs currently distributed are updated to new programs
on the next distribution date. You can save the current
programs by moving them to the âSaved programâ folder
before the distributed program is updated. You can check
âMemory infoâ for unused memory space you can save to.
You can save up to 10 programs sharing the memory space
with other data files, however, the number of programs you
can save decreases depending on the data volume. (See
page 508)
YES
See page 194 when programs are stored to the maximum.
Set desktop/
key
Add desktop icon
See page 30.
long press set. See page 386.
Edit title
Enter a title.
You can enter up to 31 full-pitch/63 half-pitch characters.
Reset title
You can reset the title to the default.
YES
Multiple-choice
You can select and delete multiple programs stored in âSaved
programâ folder.
Put a check mark for programs to be deleted
i(
)DeleteYES
Connect to URL
You can access the URL when the program has the URL
information.
YES
Display image
You can display the program images stored in the program.
Press r to return to the list.
Memory info
You can display the used memory space (estimate).
You can display them also by pressing c(
).
Delete/Delete this
You can delete the program.
YES
Delete all
You can delete all the programs stored in the âSaved
programâ folder.
Enter your Terminal Security CodeYES
Listening
You can set the effect of the sound from an earphone or
Bluetooth device.
Select an item.
Surround . . . .Makes the sound natural and stereophonic.
Natur 1/2 . . . .Complements the cooped-up feeling specific to
earphones and plays back natural sound.
Select 1 or 2 according to your taste.
OFF . . . . . . . .Sets Listening to âOFFâ.
Equalizer
You can change the quality of the sound from an earphone or
Bluetooth device.
Select an item.
Normal . . . . . Reproduces normal sound quality.
H.BASS1 . . . Enhances bass sound.
H.BASS2 . . . Enhances bass sound more deeply than
H.BASS1.
Train. . . . . . . Minimizes abnormal sound that causes sound
leakage.
Information
The playable mode setting is invalid for the programs having the time zone
restrictions.
Even if you set to âRepeatâ, the program is not played back repeatedly if it has no time
zone restrictions but has restrictions on the number of playbacks.
You cannot move the program when its obtaining is not completed, or the move
restriction or time zone restriction is set for the program.
When the next program is delivered, the edited title is overwritten by the new title.
Even when you delete the program, the program setting is not released.
See page 254.
Chapter info
You can display the title, play time, etc. of the chapter currently
played back.
Connect to URL
See page 254.
Chapter list
See page 254.
Previous image
You can display a previous image.
Play mode setting
See page 254.
Next image
You can display a next image.
Music
Function Menu during Playback/Pause
Program info
Sound effect
Remaster
You can bring the sound from an earphone or Bluetooth
device to the original sound by complementing high-pitch
range lost at data compression.
ON or OFF
Information
Even if an earphone or Bluetooth device is not connected, the respective setting
contents are displayed on the display.
You can display up to three images, however, you may not be able to display them
depending on the program.
255
Playing Music
You can play back music files on your FOMA terminal by using MUSIC
Player or i-motion player.
â MUSIC Player (See page 258)
By âMUSIC Playerâ of âMUSICâ, you can play back Chaku-uta FullÂŽ music files or music
files saved from music CDs to the microSD card via a personal computer.
You can display mail, i-mode sites, and so on, while listening to music by MUSIC
Player (Play Background).
See page 479 for the combination patterns that can be started.
â i-motion Player (See page 326)
From the âimotionâ folder in âData boxâ, you can play back the voice-only i-motion file
(including music data of AAC format) or AAC format files stored on the microSD card.
Saving Music Files
Download Chaku-uta FullÂŽ Music Files
Music
You can download Chaku-uta FullÂŽ music files from sites. You can save
up to 250 Mbytes of files including other data files. (See page 504)
Call up a Chaku-uta FullÂŽ music file downloadable site
Select a Chaku-uta FullÂŽ music fileSaveYES
Select âPlayâ to play back the Chaku-uta FullÂŽ music file. See page 261 for
operations while a Chaku-uta FullÂŽ music file is being played back.
Select âPropertyâ to display the Chaku-uta FullÂŽ music file information. (See
âMusic infoâ on page 264)
See page 194 when Chaku-uta FullÂŽ music files are stored to the maximum.
Select a destination folder.
Press l(
) to display folders at the second-tier level or lower, if they
exist. Press r to return to the upper level.
256
When downloading Chaku-uta FullÂŽ music file is suspended
When you press l(
) to suspend downloading or when the downloading is
suspended by an incoming call, the confirmation display appears asking whether to
resume downloading. Select âYESâ to resume downloading the remaining part. Select
âNOâ to show the data acquisition completion display. Select âSave pt.â to save it to a
folder in âi-modeâ folder in âMUSICâ in âData boxâ.
You can re-download the rest of the partially saved file from âData boxâ.
The title name of the partially saved Chaku-uta FullÂŽ music file takes the date and time
when it is downloaded.
When the playable period or playable deadline of the partially saved Chaku-uta FullÂŽ
music file has expired, you cannot download the remaining segments of the file.
Further, the partially saved file is deleted when you save re-obtained data.
About Uta-hodai
Uta-hodai files are the Chaku-uta FullÂŽ music files you can play back just for a period of
the contract with a content provider. The playable deadline is specified in the license
information that is downloaded together with the music file.
Even when the playable deadline has expired, you can play back the music file by
updating the license.
When a music file (Chaku-uta FullÂŽ music file downloaded on the membership service
basis) whose playable deadline has expired is found at the start of MUSIC Player, the
confirmation display appears asking whether to update the playable deadline. Select
âYESâ to update the file (Packet communication fee is charged). Select âNOâ not to use
the music file. See page 259 for starting MUSIC Player.
Some Uta-hodai music files are applied with surplus playable days even after the
playable deadline has passed. During this period, you can play back files without
updating the playable deadline information. When the surplus playable days are over,
you cannot play back the files. Also if you download a music file with playable period
not updated, you cannot play it back before it is saved.
When the upper limit of the (membership) music services you can register is exceeded,
the confirmation display appears asking whether to overwrite them. Select âYESâ to
overwrite a music service whose playable deadline is the oldest. You can no longer
play back the music files downloaded from the overwritten service.
Packet communication fee for updating the playable deadline during international
roaming is not supported by Pake-hodai, Pake-hodai full, and Pake-hodai double.
Information
You can save up to 5 Mbytes per Chaku-uta FullÂŽ music file.
When the Uta-hodai music file set for the ring tone or alarm tone needs to be updated
because the playable deadline has expired, the default tone sounds when a call
comes in, or an alarm sounds/vibrates.
For a Chaku-uta FullÂŽ music file that has restrictions on the number of playbacks,
playable period, or playable deadline, â
â is displayed at the head of the title. If you
remove the battery and keep it aside for a long time, the date/time information in the
FOMA terminal might be reset. In that case, you cannot play back the Chaku-uta FullÂŽ
music file that has restrictions on the playable period or playable deadline. See âMusic
infoâ for checking the playback restrictions.
Partially saved Chaku-uta FullÂŽ music files cannot be played back from Data Box.
Save WMA Files
You can use Windows Media Player 10/11 to save Windows MediaÂŽ
Audio (WMA) files from a personal computer to the microSD card.
You can save up to 1000 WMA files.
As well as music files, you can save playlists, jacket images, and license keys.
Prepare devices required for saving WMA files
First, prepare the devices required for saving WMA files.
P-09A
microSD card
FOMA USB Cable with Charge Function 01/02 (option)
Personal computer with Windows Media Player 10 (10.00.00.3802 or later)/11 installed
シWhen you use Windows Media Player 10/11 in Windows XP, use Windows XP
Service Pack 2 or later. When you use Windows Vista, use Windows Media Player 11.
Before connecting the FOMA terminal to a personal computer, you need to check the
version of Windows Media Player.
Use the FOMA terminal as reader/writer
Set âUSB mode settingâ to âMTP modeâ. (See page 353)
Save music files to the microSD card
You cannot save WMA files to the FOMA terminal.
For how to operate Windows Media Player 10/11, refer to Help for Windows Media
Player 10/11.
When you finish saving, remove the FOMA USB Cable with Charge Function 01/02
from the FOMA terminal.
When you remove the FOMA USB Cable with Charge Function 01/02, remove it after
finishing the software in use.
About the NapsterÂŽ Application
You have the ability to save music files using the NapsterÂŽ application.
Please download the NapsterÂŽ application from the following website (in Japanese
only):
http://www.napster.jp/
If you have any questions about the NapsterÂŽ application, refer to the following website
(in Japanese only):
http://www.napster.jp/support/
Information
Do not remove the microSD card during saving a file. You may lose the file.
Music files and jacket images are saved to /PRIVATE/DOCOMO/MMFILE/WM/ on
the microSD card.
The WMA files saved to the microSD card using another FOMA terminal might not be
recognized by the P-09A. Further, the files might not be recognized by the P-09A
even when it is connected to the personal computer with âUSB mode settingâ set to
âMTP modeâ.
In this case, delete âWMâ folder and âWM_SYSTEMâ folder on the microSD card by
using your personal computer, or format the microSD card (see page 352). Note that
not only music files but also all the other files are deleted when the microSD card is
formatted.
When unused memory space on the microSD card becomes less than 300 Kbytes,
the card might not be recognized by a personal computer. Check the unused memory
space on the microSD card and delete unnecessary data files if unused memory
space is 300 Kbytes or less. Then connect to the personal computer after setting
âUSB mode settingâ to âMTP modeâ again.
257
Music
Start Windows Media Player 10/11 and save WMA files to the microSD
card.
Save Music Files by Using SD-Audio
By using SD-Jukebox (commercial item), you can save the music files on
the music CDs to the microSD card as AAC format data.
By using the microSD card adapter (option), you can save music files to the microSD
card directly from a personal computer as well.
âťThe following steps are an example for when the FOMA terminal is used as a
microSD reader/writer for saving music files.
About SD-Jukebox
You can purchase SD-Jukebox from the following website (in Japanese only):
http://club.panasonic.jp/mail/sense/
For details about operating environments, refer to the following website (in Japanese
only):
http://panasonic.jp/support/software/sdjb/
Prepare devices required for saving music files
Music
First, prepare the devices required for saving music files.
P-09A
microSD card
FOMA USB Cable with Charge Function 01/02 (option)
Personal computer (Windows XP, Windows 2000, or Windows Vista)
SD-Jukebox (commercial item)
Music CD you want to save
Install SD-Jukebox
Install SD-Jukebox on the personal computer.
Use the FOMA terminal as reader/writer
Set âUSB mode settingâ to âmicroSD modeâ. (See page 353)
258
Save music files to the microSD card
Start SD-Jukebox and set a music CD on the personal computer. Then
use SD-Jukebox to save music files to the microSD card.
For how to operate SD-Jukebox, refer to Help for SD-Jukebox.
When you finish saving, remove the FOMA USB Cable with Charge Function 01/02
from the FOMA terminal.
Using MUSIC Player
You can play back Chaku-uta FullÂŽ music files obtained from sites or
music files saved to the microSD card.
To play back music files, select âMUSIC Playerâ from âMUSICâ on Main
Menu. Play Background is available so that you can use mail functions,
display sites, and so on, while listening to music.
To manage folders or data files, select âMUSICâ from âData boxâ on Main
Menu.
Note that battery consumption will be faster when you use MUSIC Player.
You can enjoy playing back music in stereo sound by connecting to the Stereo
Earphone Set (option). Also, you can enjoy listening to music wirelessly by using a
commercial Bluetooth device. (See page 400)
If the number of stored files increases, it may take long to start MUSIC Player.
For details on MUSIC Player, refer to the DOCOMO website.
1
The Player Menu display appears.
When the information of the previously played music file
remains, the playback starts at the position and in the
mode according to the information.
Player Menu display
Select an item.
All tracks. . . Displays all the music files saved on the FOMA terminal and
microSD card.
Artist . . . . . . Displays all the artist names.
Highlight the name of the artist you want to listen to and press
Oo(
), then all the album names of the selected artist are
displayed. (Go to Album)
Album . . . . . Displays all the albums.
Highlight the name of the album you want to listen to and press
Oo(
).
Genre. . . . . . Displays all the genres.
Highlight the genre you want to listen to and press Oo(
).
Playlist. . . . . Displays all the playlists created by the FOMA terminal and personal
computer.
See page 267 for the playback of playlists.
Select a music file.
Playback starts from the selected music file in the order listed on the Type list or
playlist. â
â is displayed while MUSIC Player is activated, and â
â is
displayed when the music shifts to pause state during Play Background.
The ââ
â mark is added to the music file which is currently played back or was
previously played back.
Press h during playback, pause, or halt to end MUSIC Player.
When you press m(
) or r during playback, the former Music list is
displayed.
259
Music
The ââ
â mark is added to the
playlist which is being played
back or was previously played
back.
When you select âArtistâ,
âAlbumâ, or âGenreâ, and press
l(
) from the Type list,
all the music files stored in the
selected item are played back.
You can switch display format
each time you press
c(
) from the Music
list.
Type list
Music list
When â
â is displayed on
(For Artist)
the Type list or the Music list,
you can display the playback display of previously played back music file or
music file in-play by pressing m(
).
You might not be able to display all the stored music files depending on their file
size.
The images on the right are displayed
when you cannot display a preview
image:
Incomplete Cannot be No image,
download
displayed
etc.
Play Back Music Files
mMUSICMUSIC Player
3
Manage Folders or Music Files
mData boxMUSIC
Music Folder list
Music
Select an item.
MUSIC Player. . . MUSIC Player starts. (See page 259)
i-mode. . . . . . . . . Displays the i-mode (Chaku-uta FullÂŽ) Folder list. Select a folder.
WMA . . . . . . . . . . Displays the WMA list.
Each time you press m
from the i-mode (Chaku-uta
FullÂŽ) Folder list, you can
switch between the folders
in the FOMA terminal and
the microSD card.
You can switch display
format each time you press
c(
) from the
Chaku-uta FullÂŽ Music list
and WMA list.
See page 259 when you
cannot display a preview
Chaku-uta FullÂŽ
i-mode (Chaku-uta
image.
FullÂŽ) Folder list
Music list
See page 193 when you
select âSearch by i-modeâ.
Some WMA files have playable license (number/period/
deadline).
WMA list
Select a Chaku-uta FullÂŽ music file or WMA file.
Only the selected music file is played back as a demo.
When you close the FOMA terminal during playback, the playback stops.
Press h during playback or pause to end playback.
You might be able to play back a Chaku-uta FullÂŽ music file by pressing
l(
) or selecting âPlayâ from the Function menu while selecting it on
another function.
Chaku-uta FullÂŽ music files are shown by titles for control (âMusic title - Artist
nameâ in default title) when you display them from the âi-modeâ folder. When you
operate them from âMUSIC Playerâ, they are shown by titles.
â About playback display during using MUSIC Player
âŚThe jacket image which is stored in the music file
(When no images are stored, an animation
appears.)
âŚTrack number/Number of total music files
âŚTitle
âŚArtist name
âŚPlayback state
âŚPlayback time/Total playback time
âŚPlay mode (No indication for âNormalâ)
: Play only one
: Repeat one
: Repeat all
: Random
: Random play & repeat
: Demo (Displayed only in demo playbacks.)
âŚEqualizer
: Normal
: H.BASS2
âŚStereo/Monaural
: Stereo
âŚListening (No indication for âOFFâ)
: Surround
: H.BASS1
: Train
: Monaural
When the FOMA terminal
is closed
: Natur1
âŚRemaster (No indication for âOFFâ)
: ON
âŚIcon of Bluetooth connection (No indication for not connected)
: Being connected
âŚSound volume
260
: Natur2
â Operations of MUSIC Player in use
Operation
Halt
Key operation
l(
Oo(
Pause
Oo(
From the playback display during use of MUSIC Player, you can do the
following operations by using the switch of an earphone/microphone
(option):
Operation
) to play back
Press once.
To play back, press again.
Replay next file
Press twice in succession.
Replay previous file
Press three times in succession.
When playback time is over three seconds, no previous
music file is found, and âRandomâ or âRandom play&repeatâ
is set, you go back to the beginning of the file.
Oo(
) to play back
Sound volume
adjustment
Bo or >
Replay next file
Vo or > (for at least one second)
Replay previous file
Co or < (for at least one second)
When playback time is over three seconds, no previous
music file is found, and âRandomâ or âRandom play&repeatâ
is set, you go back to the beginning of the file.
Search (fast forward)âť Press and hold Vo.
Switch operation
Pause
â Playback specifications of Chaku-uta FullÂŽ music files
File format
MP4
Codec
MPEG-4 AAC
MPEG-4 AAC+ (HE-AAC)
Search (fast rewind)âť Press and hold Co.
Enhanced aacPlus
m(
Bit rate
8 to 128 kbps
Play background
c(
Extension
3gp
Display image/
Display lyric/Player
Each time of pressing switches displays in order of âPlayback
display (Jacket image)â â âFull display lyric imageâ â âFull
display jacket imageâ.
â Playback specifications of SD-Audio files and number of storable files
Display next image
Display previous image 1
Music
Display list
File format
MPEG-2 AAC, MPEG-2 AAC+SBR
Bit rate
32 to 256 kbps
Maximum number of
storable files
999 files
Maximum number of
playlist
99 files (Up to 99 files can be stored in a single playlist.)âť
Remaster
Each time of pressing switches between âONâ and âOFFâ.
Listening
Each time of pressing switches in order of âOFFâ â
âSurroundâ â âNatur1â â âNatur2â.
âťExcept âAll tracksâ.
File format
WMA (Windows Media Audio 9 Standard)
Equalizer
Each time of pressing switches in order of âNormalâ â
âH.BASS1â â âH.BASS2â â âTrainâ.
Bit rate
32 to 192 kbps
Maximum number of
storable files
Maximum 1,000 files
Maximum number of
playlist
100 files (Up to 250 files can be stored in a single playlist.)
âť You cannot operate during halt or pause.
You cannot use some operations during playback of a demo.
â Playback specifications of WMA files and number of storable files
261
â Icons on the Music list
When you select a music file from âMUSICâMUSIC Playerâ, the following icons are
displayed:
Icon
Description
All Chaku-uta FullÂŽ music files are set with file restrictions. See page 225 for file
restrictions.
Icon
âť
Stored in the FOMA terminal
Acquired source
Sites
âťFor the copyrighted file movable to the microSD card, â
â is displayed.
Stored on the microSD card
Information
SD-Audio file format
Chaku-uta
FullÂŽ
file format
WMA file format
UIM security function
Chaku-uta FullÂŽ music file with playback restrictions
Chaku-uta FullÂŽ music file with expired playback restrictions
Playable Uta-hodai music file
Uta-hodai music file which needs to be updated because the
playable deadline has expired
Music
Unplayable Uta-hodai music file
File with file restrictions
â Icons on the Chaku-uta FullÂŽ Music list
When you select a Chaku-uta FullÂŽ music file from âData boxâMUSICâ,
the following icons are displayed:
Icon
Audio format
AAC, AAC+(HE-AAC),
Enhanced aacPlus
â
Type
MP4 file
Partially saved Chaku-uta FullÂŽ music files
Some Chaku-uta FullÂŽ music files and Uta-hodai music files have restrictions on the
number of playbacks, playable deadline, or playable period. The following icons are
added.
シFile with playback restrictions. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . â â
シFile with playback restrictions expired . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . â â
シPlayable Uta-hodai music file . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . â
â
シUta-hodai music file which needs to be updated because the playable
deadline has expired. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . â
â
シUnplayable Chaku-uta FullÂŽ music file or Uta-hodai music file. . . . . . . . . . . â â
You can check the playback restrictions for the file by âMusic infoâ.
262
Regardless of the number of stored music files, MUSIC Player can recognize up to
1,500 music files in the display order on the All tracks list. However, the number of
recognizable music files decreases depending on the data size of music files.
Even when the file format is supported, you might not be able to play back some files.
The information of the previously played music file is erased if you do the following
operations:
シ When you remove/insert the microSD card
シ When you turn on/off the FOMA terminal
シ When you execute âReset settingsâ or âInitializeâ
シ When you delete the previously played music file
シ When you delete the previously played playlist
シ When you do not insert the microSD card on which the previously played music file
is stored
シ When you set âUSB mode settingâ to âmicroSD modeâ or âMTP modeâ and connect
to a personal computer
シ When you played back a music file from other than a playlist last time, and then
when you perform âEdit music infoâ or âReset music infoâ, or you newly download,
save or delete a Chaku-uta FullÂŽ music file
シ When the music file previously played is an Uta-hodai music file which needs to be
updated because the playable deadline has expired
シ When the previously played music file is a WMA file and the WMA license becomes
invalid
Partially saved Chaku-uta FullÂŽ music files are not displayed when you operate from
MUSIC Player.
If you try to play back a music file with a low battery, the confirmation display appears
asking whether to play it back. The battery alert tone sounds regardless of the setting
of âKeypad soundâ. When the battery becomes low during playback (including during
Play Background), the playback pauses, and the confirmation display appears asking
whether to end the playback.
Note that the battery is consumed sooner if you perform the fast-forward and other
similar operations frequently.
Information
In the following cases, the playback pauses and resumes after you finish each
operation:
シ When you make/receive a voice call or videophone call
シ When you receive a mail message or Message R/F while âReceiving displayâ is set
to âAlarm preferredâ or the Stand-by display is shown
シ When an alarm of âAlarmâ, âScheduleâ, âToDoâ, âTV timerâ or âTimer recordingâ
sounds
Depending on the event which occurred, the confirmation display might appear
asking whether to end MUSIC Player.
When a music file is switched to the previous or next one, the music file whose
playable deadline or playable period has expired, or WMA file whose WMA license
becomes invalid is skipped. When the Chaku-uta FullÂŽ music file has restrictions on
the number of playbacks, the confirmation display appears asking whether to play it
back regardless of the remaining number of playbacks. However, the music file
whose number of playbacks has finished is skipped.
When unused memory space on the microSD card becomes less than 300 Kbytes,
you can no longer play back WMA files. To play back WMA files, check the unused
memory space on the microSD card and delete unnecessary data files if unused
memory space is 300 Kbytes or less.
Function Menu of the Music Folder List/i-mode (Chaku-uta
FullÂŽ) Folder List/Player Menu Display
Select a play mode.
Normal . . . . . . . . . Plays back the music files sorted by type or
in the playlist in order as listed.
Finishes after the last music file is played
back.
Play only one . . . Plays back the selected music file once.
Repeat one . . . . . Plays back the selected music file
repeatedly.
Repeat all . . . . . . Plays back the music files sorted by type or
in the playlist in order as listed repeatedly.
Random. . . . . . . . Plays back the music files sorted by type or
in the playlist at random. Finishes after all
the music files are played back.
Random play&repeat
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Plays back the music files sorted by type or
in the playlist at random repeatedly.
Add folder
Enter a folder name.
You can enter up to 10 full-pitch/20 half-pitch characters.
You can create a total of 25 folders at each level up to the
second-tier level in the FOMA terminal. You can create
folders at each level up to the seventh-tier level on the
microSD card.
Edit folder name
Enter a folder name.
You can enter up to 10 full-pitch/20 half-pitch characters.
Delete folder
Delete this
You can delete a highlighted user folder.
Enter your Terminal Security CodeYES
Delete selected
Put a check mark for user folders to be deleted
l(
)Enter your Terminal Security Code
YES
Delete all
You can delete all user folders at the same level.
Enter your Terminal Security CodeYES
263
Music
Play mode setting
Select storage
You can set the destination folder for when you move the
Chaku-uta FullÂŽ music file to the microSD card. You can set it
for up to seventh-tier-level folders.
YES
Memory info
You can display the used memory space (estimate)/number of
stored items.
You can display them also by pressing c(
).
Point ring tone
Music info
You can display the title, artist name, playback time, etc.
Press i(
) with the music information of Chaku-uta
FullÂŽ music file displayed and select âEdit music infoâ; then
you can edit the information contents. Select a desired item
and then edit it. To return the edited information to the
unedited one, select âReset music infoâ. Select a desired
item and select âYESâ.
Add to playlist
Select a storing method.
Add one . . . . You can store the music file.
Add some . . . Select the music files to be stored, and press
l(
).
The music files are stored in the displayed order.
Music
Information
You cannot create a user folder in the WMA folder.
All the data files in the folder are deleted.
This function works as âDelete thisâ on the microSD card.
If you delete the Chaku-uta FullÂŽ music file set for another function, the setting returns
to the default.
â
â is displayed for the folder set as a destination.
When you execute Check microSD, or create or edit a folder by using a personal
computer, the destination folder on the microSD card might be changed. When the
setting is changed, set the destination folder again.
Select a playlist you store music files to.
When you create a new playlist to store music files to, select
âNew playlistâ and enter a playlist name. When 30 playlists
are already stored, the confirmation display appears asking
whether to delete them to save a new one.
Function Menu of the Chaku-uta FullÂŽ Music List/Type List/
Music List/WMA List
Player menu
You can show the Player Menu display from the Type list or
Music list.
Play mode setting
See page 263.
Move
You can move the Chaku-uta FullÂŽ music file in the FOMA
terminal to another folder inside it, or can move the Chaku-uta
FullÂŽ music file on the microSD card to another folder inside it.
Select a destination folder.
Press l(
) to display folders at the second-tier level
or lower, if they exist. Press r to return to the upper level.
Move to microSD
You can move the Chaku-uta FullÂŽ music file to the microSD
card. (See page 350)
Set as ring tone
Fullsong ring tone
264
You can set a full piece of Chaku-uta FullÂŽ music file as a ring
tone.
Select an item.
For a Chaku-uta FullÂŽ music file on the microSD card, the
confirmation display appears asking whether to move it to
the FOMA terminal. (See page 350)
You can set a part of Chaku-uta FullÂŽ music file as a ring tone.
Select a range to be setSelect an item.
You can check the range to be set by pressing
l(
).
For a Chaku-uta FullÂŽ music file on the microSD card, the
confirmation display appears asking whether to move it to
the FOMA terminal. (See page 350)
Move to phone
You can move the Chaku-uta FullÂŽ music file on the microSD
card to the FOMA terminal. (See page 350)
Edit title
You can edit the title of Chaku-uta FullÂŽ music file.
Enter a title.
For a Chaku-uta FullÂŽ music file in the FOMA terminal, you
can enter up to 9 full-pitch/18 half-pitch characters.
For a Chaku-uta FullÂŽ music file on the microSD card, you
can enter up to 18 full-pitch/36 half-pitch characters.
Reset title
You can reset the title of a Chaku-uta FullÂŽ music file to âMusic
title - Artist nameâ.
YES
Add folder
See page 263.
Edit folder name
See page 263.
Display lyric
You can display lyric images stored in the Chaku-uta FullÂŽ
music file.
When multiple lyric images are stored, press No to display
a previous or next lyric image. You can display up to seven
lyric images.
When the image is storable, press Oo(
) and select
âYESâ, then select any destination folder to save it.
Select storage
See page 264.
Memory info
You can display the used memory space (estimate)/number of
stored items.
Delete this
YES
Delete all
You can delete all Chaku-uta FullÂŽ music files or WMA files in
the folder.
Enter your Terminal Security CodeYES
If there is a user folder in a folder, you cannot delete the user
folder or Chaku-uta FullÂŽ music files in the user folder.
Delete folder
Delete this
See page 263.
Delete selected
See page 263.
Delete all
See page 263.
Information
FullÂŽ
You can select multiple Chaku-uta
music files and
operate them.
Put a check mark for Chaku-uta FullÂŽ music files to be
operatedi(
)Select an item.
Delete. . . .See âDelete thisâ on page 265.
Move . . . .See page 264.
Connect to URL
You can access the URL when the Chaku-uta FullÂŽ music file
has the URL information.
YES
Display image
You can display jacket images stored in the music file.
When multiple jacket images are stored, press No to
display a previous or next jacket image.
When the image is storable, press Oo(
) and select
âYESâ, then select any destination folder to save it.
265
Music
Multiple-choice
When an Uta-hodai music file set for a ring tone cannot be played back or needs to be
updated because playable deadline is expired or the UIM security function is set, the
default ring tone returns.
See âMusic infoâ for checking whether to be set as ring tone.
You cannot add music files to the playlist created using a personal computer.
If there is no music title or artist name, it is displayed as âUnknownâ for each.
Some images may not be displayed correctly.
If you delete the Chaku-uta FullÂŽ music file set for another function, the setting returns
to the default.
If you delete the WMA file stored in the WMA playlist, it is released from WMA playlist.
When the last WMA file is deleted or all the WMA files are deleted, the licensed file is
deleted at the same time.
Function Menu during Playback/Pause/Halt
Player menu
Play mode setting
You can show the Player Menu display from the playback
display during using MUSIC Player.
Playback state continues even when you show the Player
Menu display.
See page 263.
Music
Sound effect
Remaster
You can bring the sound from an earphone or Bluetooth
device to the original sound by complementing high-pitch
range lost at data compression.
ON or OFF
Listening
You can set the effect of the sound from an earphone or
Bluetooth device.
Select an item.
Surround . . . .Makes the sound natural and stereophonic.
Natur 1/2 . . . . .Complements the cooped-up feeling specific
to earphones and plays back natural sound.
Select 1 or 2 according to your taste.
OFF . . . . . . . . .Sets Listening to âOFFâ.
Equalizer
You can change the quality of the sound from an earphone or
Bluetooth device.
Select an item.
Normal . . . . .Reproduces normal sound quality.
H.BASS1. . . .Enhances bass sound.
H.BASS2. . . .Enhances bass sound more deeply than
H.BASS1.
Train . . . . . . .Minimizes abnormal sound that causes sound
leakage.
Music info
See page 264.
Connect to URL
See page 265.
Display image/
Display lyric/Player
You can change the playback display.
Display image . . . Shows the jacket image on the full display.
Display lyric . . . . . Shows the lyric image on the full display.
Player . . . . . . . . . . Shows the playback display.
266
Previous image/
Previous lyric
You can display a previous jacket image or lyric image.
Next image/Next lyric
You can display a next jacket image or lyric image.
Information
Even if an earphone or Bluetooth device is not connected, the respective setting
contents are displayed on the display.
For Chaku-uta FullÂŽ music files, you can display up to 3 jacket images and up to 7
lyric images.
For SD-Audio files saved by SD-Jukebox, you can display up to 20 jacket images, and
for WMA file, you can display up to 2 image buried in a file. When you use the
NapsterÂŽ application program, you can display 1 image stored as a jacket image.
There are no lyric images for them.
Using Playlist
You can create the list of music files you want to listen to, and play them
back in the order you like.
You can play back using the playlists created by the FOMA terminal or
Windows Media Player, or the SD-Audio playlists created by SD-Jukebox.
Create Playlist
Player Menu displayPlaylist
The maximum number of playlists that can be created and the number of music files
that can be stored per playlist are as follows:
Creating source
Number of playlist
Number of music files that
can be stored per playlist
Playlists created by FOMA
terminal
Maximum 30
(Except âAll tracksâ)
100
Maximum 100
250
Maximum 99
(Except âAll tracksâ)
99
Playlists created by
Windows Media Player
SD-Audio playlists created
by SD-Jukebox
â Icons on the Playlist list
Icon
Type
All tracks
All tracks for SD-Audio
FOMA playlist
SD-Audio playlist
i(
)Create playlist
Select a type and display the Music list
Put a check mark for music files to be stored
l(
The music files are stored in the displayed order.
Enter a playlist name.
You can enter up to 18 full-pitch/36 half-pitch characters.
Information
In a playlist, you cannot store partially saved Chaku-uta FullÂŽ music files or files with
playback restrictions expired.
Play Back Playlist
Playlist listSelect a playlist
Select a music file.
Press l(
) from the Playlist list to play back the
music files from the top one in the selected playlist.
You cannot play back a playlist from âMUSICâ of Data
Box.
WMA playlist
Music list of a Playlist
267
Music
When you create a playlist on the FOMA terminal, you can store
music files saved on the FOMA terminal or microSD card, the WMA files saved by
Windows Media Player, and the SD-Audio files saved by SD-Jukebox into the same
playlist.
the Chaku-uta FullÂŽ
Playlist list
Music
Function Menu of the Playlist List
Player menu
You can show the Player Menu display.
Play mode setting
See page 263.
Create playlist
See page 267.
Copy playlist
Enter a playlist name.
You can enter up to 18 full-pitch/36 half-pitch characters.
When you copy the SD-Audio playlist or WMA playlist, it is
copied to the FOMA terminal as the FOMA playlist.
Edit playlist name
You can edit the name of the FOMA playlist.
Edit the playlist name.
You can enter up to 18 full-pitch/36 half-pitch characters.
Add
You can add the music files to the FOMA playlist.
Select a type and display the Music list
Put a check mark for the music files to be added
l(
The music files are stored at the end of the list in the displayed
order.
Delete playlist
You can delete the FOMA playlist.
Select a deleting method.
Delete this . . . . . . . You can delete the playlist.
Delete selected . . . Select the playlists to be deleted, and press
l(
).
Delete all . . . . . . . . Enter your Terminal Security Code.
YES
Information
You cannot copy the WMA playlist with no music file stored in.
268
Function Menu of the Music List of a Playlist
Player menu
You can display the Player Menu display.
Playback state continues even when you show the Player Menu
display.
Play mode setting
See page 263.
Music info
See page 264.
Add
See page 268.
DEL from playlist
You can release the music files from the FOMA playlist.
Select a deleting method.
DEL one from list . . . . . . You can release the music file.
DEL some from list. . . . . Select the music files to be released,
and press l(
).
DEL all from list. . . . . . . . You can delete the whole playlist.
YES
Order to play
You can change the order of playlist created on the FOMA
terminal.
Select a music fileUse Bo to change the order to play
Oo(
To change the order in succession, repeat the above steps.
Add to playlist
See page 264.
Display image
See page 265.
Display lyric
See page 265.
l(
Information
You cannot release music files from the playlists created on a personal computer.
i-Îąppli/i-Widget
i-Îąppli . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Downloading i-Îąppli from Sites . . . . . . . . .
Starting i-Îąppli . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Setting i-Îąppli . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Starting i-Îąppli Automatically . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Using i-Îąppli Call . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Setting i-Îąppli Call . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Operating i-Îąppli Stand-by Display
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Displaying i-Îąppli Data Files on the microSD Card
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
i-Widget. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Using i-Widget . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Setting i-Widget . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Starting Widget Appli . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
270
270
271
285
286
287
288
289
290
290
291
292
292
269
i-Îąppli
âi-Îąppliâ is a software program for i-mode mobile phones. You can use
your FOMA terminal more conveniently by downloadingâť various
software programs from the i-mode site. For example, you can
automatically update the stock price information or weather information,
and enjoy games without accessing network.
It also supports i-Îąppli online which enables the online communication
among multiple parties using real time communication and i-Îąppli call
(see page 287), so you can enjoy versus games and chat applications.
Also, some i-Îąppli programs are compatible with i-Widget (see page 290).
âťYou are separately charged a packet communication fee.
The packet communication fee for the overseas use differs from the one for the
domestic use. For details, refer to âMobile Phone Userâs Guide [International Services]â
or the DOCOMO Global Service website.
For details on i-Îąppli, refer to âMobile Phone Userâs Guide [i-mode] FOMA versionâ.
i-Îąppli/i-Widget
Downloading i-Îąppli from Sites
You can download software programs from sites to the FOMA terminal.
You can save up to 100 files (up to about 2 Mbytes per file), however, the
number of files you can save decreases depending on the data volume
because the memory space is shared with other data files. (See page 508)
Call up an i-Îąppli downloadable site
Select a software program.
Select âOKâ when downloading ends.
See page 194 when i-Îąppli programs are stored to the maximum.
When downloading ends, the display for Software Setting (Network Set, Stand-by
Set, Location Usage, Program Guide Key, or iÎąppli call) might appear. These
settings can be done also from the Software list.
YES or NO
YES . . . . Starts i-Îąppli.
NO . . . . . Returns to the site display.
270
When downloading is suspended
When you press r or h to suspend downloading an i-Îąppli program of 100 Kbytes
or more, or when downloading is suspended by the radio wave conditions, the
confirmation display appears asking whether to resume downloading. Select âYESâ to
resume downloading the remaining part. Select âNOâ to show the confirmation display
asking whether to save the file downloaded halfway. Select âYESâ to partially save the
file.
You can re-download the rest of the partially saved i-Îąppli program from the Software list.
When you downloaded mail-linked i-Îąppli
An i-Îąppli mail folder is created automatically each in the Inbox/Outbox Folder list, and
the title of the downloaded mail-linked i-Îąppli becomes the name of the folder.
You can save up to five mail-linked i-Îąppli programs.
You cannot download the software program if the mail-linked i-Îąppli using the same
folder is already in the Software list.
You cannot download mail-linked i-Îąppli while Mail Security is set.
You cannot download mail-linked i-Îąppli if the Inbox/Outbox Folder list contains five
i-Îąppli mail folders.
When re-downloading mail-linked i-Îąppli whose folder only remains, the confirmation
display appears asking whether to use the existing i-Îąppli mail folder. If you select
âYESâ, the existing folder is used. If you select âNOâ because you do not use it, the
confirmation display appears asking whether to delete an existing folder and create a
new one. You cannot download mail-linked i-Îąppli without creating a new folder.
Information
You can download pre-installed i-Îąppli programs from the
âP-SQUAREâ site (in Japanese only).
iMenuâăĄăăĽăźăŞăšă (Menu List)
âăąăźăżă¤éťčŠąăĄăźăŤăź (Mobile Phone Maker)âP-SQUARE
QR code for
accessing the site
Downloading is not available from some accessed sites.
Some i-Îąppli programs can automatically connect to the i-mode Center after they are
downloaded. However, to use this service, you need to set it in advance in âNetwork
setâ of âSoftware settingâ.
Information
Display Software Info
You can display software information when downloading i-Îąppli.
mi-ÎąppliiÎąppli settingsDisp. software info
Display or Not display
Starting i-Îąppli
i(for at least one second)
Select a software program to be started.
On the Software list, the icons show the types of i-Îąppli
programs and supported functions.
: GPS compatible i-Îąppli
: Osaifu-Keitai compatible i-Îąppli
: Management information i-Îąppli
: microSD card compatible i-Îąppli
: Vertical full display compatible i-Îąppli
: Horizontal display compatible i-Îąppli (incompatible
with full display)
: Horizontal full display compatible i-Îąppli
: i-Îąppli DX
: Mail-linked i-Îąppli
Software list
: Partially saved i-Îąppli
: Set for Auto Start
: Set for the i-Îąppli Stand-by display
: Set for both Auto Start and the i-Îąppli Stand-by display
: Can set for the i-Îąppli Stand-by display
: Downloaded from an SSL/TLS page
: Not set for IC application
: Downloaded or upgraded by using a different UIM
You can display the Software list on the microSD card by
mi-ÎąppliiÎąppli(microSD)Software list.
Each time you press c(
) from the Software list in the FOMA terminal,
the display format changes.
When you start an i-Îąppli DX program or while it is running, the confirmation
display might appear asking whether to permit the i-Îąppli DX program to use the
FOMA terminalâs information and functions.
When you start the Osaifu-Keitai compatible i-Îąppli program for the first time, the
confirmation display appears asking whether to make the UIM and IC card
compatible. The UIM information that has been made compatible is saved on the
IC card as IC owner information.
271
i-Îąppli/i-Widget
â â appears at the top of the display while software information or a software program
is being downloaded from SSL/TLS pages.
At downloading, the confirmation display might appear asking whether to send the
âPhone/Terminal and UIM IDâ. Select âYESâ to start downloading. In this case, the
âPhone/Terminal and UIM IDâ is sent to the IP (Information Provider) over the Internet,
so could be deciphered by third parties. However, your phone number, address, age,
and gender are not notified to the IP (Information Provider) or others by this operation.
If you attempt to re-download the software program that was downloaded using a
different UIM, the confirmation display appears asking whether to overwrite the
software program. With the Osaifu-Keitai compatible i-Îąppli, the confirmation display
appears telling that the data on the IC card is to be deleted. Select âYESâ to start
downloading. When downloading ends, the software program that was downloaded
using a different UIM and the data on the IC card are deleted.
You cannot download some software programs while the IC card function is working
or IC Card Lock is activated.
Some software programs that start immediately after downloading cannot be saved.
Depending on the data volume on the IC card, you might not be able to download
Osaifu-Keitai compatible i-Îąppli even if there is still available space for software
storage. Delete the displayed software programs following the confirmation display,
and then download it again. (Some software programs might not be targeted for
deletion, depending on the software type to be downloaded.)
Depending on the software program, you need to start it and delete the files on the IC
card before deleting the software program itself.
âi-Îąppli mailâ is the mail sent and saved by mail-linked i-Îąppli and mail received as
mail-linked i-Îąppli. i-Îąppli mail is automatically saved to the i-Îąppli mail folder.
When you select a partially saved i-Îąppli program, you can download the
remaining part of it.
â
â or â
â is displayed while an i-Îąppli program is running.
To end i-Îąppli, press and hold r for at least one second or press h; then
select âYESâ.
The software program you started last time comes at the top of the list. You
cannot manually change the order of software programs.
See page 193 when you select âSearch by i-modeâ.
i-Îąppli/i-Widget
Information
When a software program can be started from another program, the confirmation
display appears. When a software program to be started is not specified, select a
software program.
To start up i-Îąppli DX, set the data and time by âSet timeâ beforehand.
When a software program is running, melodies are played back at the volume set for
âPhoneâ of âRing volumeâ. However, melodies are not played back during a call.
You may need to set the communication setting while a software program is running.
When communicating frequency is extremely high in a certain period of time while an
i-Îąppli program is running, the confirmation display appears asking whether to
continue communicating.
With some software programs, you can use the Web To function and the Phone To/
AV Phone To function from i-Îąppli. However, you cannot use them while the software
program is running as the i-Îąppli Stand-by display.
If you start the camera from i-Îąppli, the shot images are not saved with ordinary
images, but are saved as part of i-Îąppli for its usage.
If you start the camera from i-Îąppli, you can specify the image size or image quality for
some i-Îąppli programs.
Imagesâť that are used by i-Îąppli and data you have entered might be sent over the
Internet to the server automatically.
âťi-Îąppli uses the following types of images:
ăťImages shot by the camera after it is started from a camera-linked application
program
ăťImages obtained by the infrared communication function of i-Îąppli
ăťImages downloaded from sites or Internet websites
ăťImages obtained from Data Box by i-Îąppli
i-Îąppli mail running under mail-linked i-Îąppli might not be displayed correctly.
272
Information
Some i-Îąppli programs save the various information used on the i-Îąppli programs
when you end them. However, the information might not be saved if the low battery
alarm sounds or the battery pack is removed while the i-Îąppli program is running. If
the battery level indicates â â, either press -h or end the i-Îąppli program in
accordance with the operation of each software program.
You can save the data files of some software programs to the microSD card, but you
might not be able to use them for another model. You can check âiÎąppli dataâ for the
software programs that use the microSD card.
Some IPs (Information Providers) may access the software program stored in your
mobile phone and have it directly halted, depending on the software program. In that
case, you will not be able to start or upgrade the software program, or use it for the
Stand-by display. You can delete it or display the software information. To resume
running the software program, you need to receive the communication to cancel the
software halting state. Contact the IP (Information Provider) to inquire about that.
Some IPs (Information Providers) might send data to the software program stored in
your mobile phone depending on the software program.
When the IP (Information Provider) requests to halt or re-open the software program
or sends data to it, the mobile phone communicates and â â is displayed. In this
case, you are not charged a communication fee.
With some software programs, you can perform registering or deleting My Menu on
the i-Îąppli program.
With some software programs, you can download Chaku-uta FullÂŽ music files via
i-Îąppli program. You can save the obtained Chaku-uta FullÂŽ music files to the same
storage location as the ordinary Chaku-uta FullÂŽ music files.
To creators of i-Îąppli
If you encounter an error while creating a software program, the Trace Information
display might help identify the problem.
For how to check the trace information, see âTrace Informationâ on page 273.
You can show the information of i-Îąppli by -mi-ÎąppliAbout iÎąppli.
Use Bar Code Reader
You can use the camera to scan JAN codes, QR codes, and CODE 128 depending on
the software program.
When you start Bar Code Reader while an i-Îąppli program is running, the camera (Bar
Code Reader) starts up. Put the code to be scanned within the guide frame and shoot.
You need to download CODE 128 compatible i-Îąppli program to scan CODE 128.
The scanned data file is used/saved by the i-Îąppli program.
Use i-Îąppli Touch
With software programs that enable you to play a match via Bluetooth communications,
you can easily connect via Bluetooth by placing the f mark over that of another FOMA
terminal equipped with i-Îąppli Touch.
When you start the program from the i-Îąppli Stand-by display or you are using the IC
card, you cannot use the program.
Security Error History
You can check the details when an i-Îąppli program ends because of a
security error.
mi-ÎąppliiÎąppli infoSecurity error history
When â
â is displayed on the Security error history display, press
i(
), and select âCopy infoâ to copy the information. Select âDelete infoâ,
and select âYESâ to delete the information.
You can display the security error history also by selecting â
â from the
desktop.
Function Menu of the Software List
Set iÎąppli To
You can set whether to permit the i-Îąppli program to start from
a link on site or mail message. You can set also for when you
place the FOMA terminal over an IC card compatible scanning
device. You can set this for each software program.
Put a check mark for items to be setl(
Some items might not be set depending on the software
program.
Auto start time
See page 286.
Trace Information
You can check the details when a software program malfunctions.
mi-ÎąppliiÎąppli infoTrace info
Software setting
Stand-by set
See page 289.
Network set
You can set whether to communicate while an i-Îąppli program
is running.
ON or OFFl(
Stand-by net
See page 289.
Icon info
You can set whether to permit the i-Îąppli program to use
information of icons indicating i-mode mail, SMS messages,
Messages R/F, battery level, Manner Mode, and within/out-of
service area.
ON or OFFl(
273
i-Îąppli/i-Widget
When the memory space for Trace Info becomes full, the information is
overwritten from the oldest one.
When â
â is displayed on the Trace information display, press
i(
), and select âCopy infoâ to copy the information. Select âDelete infoâ,
and select âYESâ to delete the information.
Select âStore in microSDâ, and select âYESâ to store in the microSD card.
i-Îąppli/i-Widget
Change mld./img.
You can set whether to permit the i-Îąppli program to change
the setting for the ring tones, Stand-by display, etc. This
function is available only for i-Îąppli DX programs.
ON, OFF or Check every changel(
If you select âCheck every changeâ, the confirmation display
appears each time the i-Îąppli program tries to change the
setting for the ring tones, Stand-by display, etc.
View P. book/hist.
You can set whether to permit the i-Îąppli program to refer to
the Phonebook, Redial, and Received Calls. This function is
available only for i-Îąppli DX programs.
ON or OFFl(
View ToruCa
You can set whether to permit the i-Îąppli program to refer to
ToruCa files. This function is available only for i-Îąppli DX
programs.
ON or OFFl(
Location usage
You can set whether to permit the i-Îąppli program to use
location information. This function is available only for i-Îąppli
DX programs.
ON or OFFl(
Program guide key You can set the software program for the i-Îąppli Program
Guide that starts up from 1Seg. You can set this only for the
i-Îąppli DX program that links to 1Seg.
ON or OFFl(
Map setting
You can set the software program used on the GPS function.
ON or OFFl(
iÎąppli call
See page 288.
Software info
You can display the software name, version, and others of the
i-Îąppli program.
YES
Upgrade
Set desktop/
key
Add desktop icon
See page 30.
long press set. See page 386.
Delete
Delete this
274
YES
Delete selected
Put a check mark for software programs to be deleted
l(
)YES
Delete all
Enter your Terminal Security CodeYES
Move to microSD
See page 350.
Move to phone
See page 350.
Power saver
You can set whether to validate Power Saver Mode for each
i-Îąppli program for when âÎąPower saverâ is set to âONâ.
ON or OFF
Information
When you set âIcon infoâ to âONâ for the i-Îąppli Stand-by display, the icon information
for unread mail/message, battery level, Manner Mode, radio wave strength and
out-of-service area can be sent to the IP (Information Provider) over the Internet in the
same way as the Phone/Terminal and UIM ID, and can be deciphered by third parties.
When the software program needs âIcon infoâ, the software program might not run if
âOFFâ is selected.
Depending on the software program, you can upgrade it at start.
At upgrading, the confirmation display might appear asking whether to send the
âPhone/Terminal and UIM IDâ. Select âYESâ to start upgrading. In this case, the
âPhone/Terminal and UIM IDâ is sent to the IP (Information Provider) over the Internet,
so could be deciphered by third parties. However, your phone number, address, age,
and gender are not notified to the IP (Information Provider) or others by this operation.
You cannot upgrade the mail-linked i-Îąppli in the following cases:
ăťWhile details of the corresponding i-Îąppli mail folder are displayed
ăťWhile Mail Security is set
ăťWhen Mail Security is set for the corresponding i-Îąppli mail folder
When you delete mail-linked i-Îąppli
The confirmation display appears asking whether to delete the i-Îąppli mail folder as well.
If you do not delete it, you can check the text of mail from the Outbox/Inbox list.
YES . . . . . . Deletes both the software program and the i-Îąppli mail folder.
NO. . . . . . . Deletes the software program only and the i-Îąppli mail folder is left.
Cancel . . . . Does not delete both the software program and i-Îąppli mail folder; the former
display returns.
You can delete neither the i-Îąppli program nor the i-Îąppli mail folder even if you select
âYESâ, in the following cases:
ăťWhile Mail Security is set
ăťWhile the folder is set with security
ăťWhile displaying details of the folder
ăťWhen the folder contains protected mail
When you delete an i-Îąppli program whose files are on the
microSD card
The confirmation display appears asking whether to delete files on the microSD card as
well.
YES . . . . . . Deletes both the software program and files on the microSD card. Press
âYESâ again on the confirmation display. You need to enter your Terminal
Security Code to execute âDeleteâ or âDelete selectedâ.
NO. . . . . . . Deletes the software program only and the files on the microSD card are left.
Cancel . . . . Does not delete both the software program and files on the microSD card,
and the former display returns.
You can delete the pre-installed i-Îąppli programs. You can re-download them from the
âP-SQUAREâ site (see page 193). When you use a UIM other than the one used for
downloading, the UIM security function (see page 37) is set for them.
Deadlines for re-download services
ăťâăăłăŞăŽć°çŹ (SUDOKU of NIKOLI)â: the end of May, 2013
ăťâăąăźăżă¤TOOLďźGLOBALďź (KEITAI TOOL )â:
the end of May, 2013
ăťâćĽčąçďźćĽä¸ç ăăăšăŁăŚçżťč¨ł for P (J-E/J-C Speech Translation for P)â:
the end of April, 2013
ăťâăăĄăăŞăźäźč¨ćż (Family Message Board)â: the end of May, 2010
ăťâNIKKEI NETâ: the end of May, 2012
ăťâćĺťčĄ¨ăŚăŁă¸ă§ăă (Timetable Widget)â: the end of May, 2012
ăťâP-SQUARE INFOâ: the end of May, 2010
ăťâäťçŽ (Sticky)â: the end of May, 2013
The re-download service might be halted or closed without notice even in the service
period.
Deadlines for downloading i-Îąppli additional data
ăťâćĽčąçďźćĽä¸ç ăăăšăŁăŚçżťč¨ł for P (J-E/J-C Speech Translation for P)â:
the end of May, 2013
ăťâăăĄăăŞăźäźč¨ćż (Family Message Board)â: the end of May, 2010
ăťâNIKKEI NETâ: the end of May, 2012
ăťâćĺťčĄ¨ăŚăŁă¸ă§ăă (Timetable Widget)â: the end of June, 2012
ăťâP-SQUARE INFOâ: the end of May, 2010
275
i-Îąppli/i-Widget
When you delete Osaifu-Keitai compatible i-Îąppli
The confirmation display appears telling that the files on the IC card will be deleted.
You cannot delete the âiD č¨ĺŽă˘ă㪠(iD appli)â.
You might not be able to delete the Osaifu-Keitai compatible i-Îąppli while the IC card
function is working or IC Card Lock is set.
Pre-installed i-Îąppli Programs
The following i-Îąppli programs are pre-installed:
ć°çŹ-SUDOKU (SUDOKU)
ăąăźăżă¤TOOLďźGLOBALďź (KEITAI TOOL )
You can play the puzzle game âć°çŹ-SUDOKUâ to place single
figures 1 through 9 into empty frames. You can make use of
the Widget Application program to check your achievement
ratio, or can start the game.
You can use this practical tool overseas.
You can freely have the rate of currencies such as âYen,â
âDollars,â or âEuro,â or the unit of different lengths or weights
compared with each other in any combination, and convert
them into the currency or unit you want to have or know about.
You can also check this tool for how to make or receive calls, or
use i-mode overseas.
Š nikoli
Software listăăłăŞăŽć°çŹ (SUDOKU of NIKOLI)
Select a menu item.
Your questions . . . . . Chooses questions to answer.
How to play . . . . . . . . Displays how to play the application.
i-Îąppli/i-Widget
276
Software listăąăźăżă¤TOOLďźGLOBALďź (KEITAI
TOOL )
Read âĺ
貏 (discharged)â thoroughlym(
Place the check mark to â揥ĺăăăăŽçťé˘ă襨示ăăŞăâ not to display âĺ
貏
(Discharged)â the next time you start the program.
Select a menu item.
Currency conversion . . .Enables you to easily convert the rate of different
currencies such as âYen,â âDollars,â or âEuro,â by any
combination into the one you want to have.
Unit conversion. . . . . . . .Enables you to easily convert the unit of different
lengths or weights in any combination into the unit you
want to know about.
WORLD WING . . . . . . . . .Enables you to check how to make or receive calls, or to
use i-mode overseas.
ăăĄăăŞăźäźč¨ćż (Family Message Board)
Family Message Board is an application program that enables
you to share memos and schedule events among your family
or friends. After registering to join a group, you can share the
memos and schedule events with other members of the group.
Further, you can check the memos and schedule events by
using compatible TV.
You are separately charged a packet communication fee.
For details, press m[誏ć(Explanation)] from each display
to show them.
For the compatible TV sets and how to access on the TVs,
refer to the information of the Function menu.
NIKKEI NET
This is a Widget application program that enables you to check
News New or Nikkei Average.
You might not be able to browse some news depending on the
period you are using this service.
Check the Widget application program for details when you
start it.
You are separately charged fees for when you use this
service.
Š 2009 Nikkei Inc. All rights reserved.
Š Panasonic Mobile Communications Co.,Ltd.
Software listăăĄăăŞăźäźč¨ćż (Family Message Board)
Read âĺŠç¨čŚç´ (Usage rules)â thoroughly
âĺćăŽăăĺŠç¨ăă (Agree with Exemption Clause)â
If you put a check mark for â揥ĺăă襨示ăăŞă (Does not show from the next
time)â, âĺŠç¨čŚç´ (Usage rules)â does not appear when you start the program
next time.
Register yourself.
You need to register yourself at the first startup. Select âăŚăźăśăźăŽçťé˛ (User's
registration)â and register yourself following the instructions on the display.
Set your group.
You need to set a group you join at the first startup.
ć°ăăă°ăŤăźăăä˝ă (Make a new group)
. . . . You can make a new group as a manager. Make a new group following the
instructions on the display.
ă°ăŤăźăăŤĺĺ (Join a group)
. . . . You can join a group already created. Join the group following the instructions
on the display.
Every user can join only one group.
P-SQUARE INFO
âP-SQUARE INFOâ is a Widget Appli program that periodically
distributes the updated information and recommendable
content of makerâs site P-SQUARE.
If you select displayed information, the i-mode browser starts
and then P-SQUARE opens.
You are separately charged a packet communication fee.
Š Millmo Inc.
277
i-Îąppli/i-Widget
äťçŽ (Sticky)
Sticky is a Widget Appli program that enables you to easily
create, edit, and browse sticky notes. You can store up to 300
characters, up to 50 items. You can change colors and display
positions of sticky notes.
ćĺťčĄ¨ăŚăŁă¸ă§ăă (Timetable Widget)
With this Widget Appli program, you can download the
timetable and check the countdown of minutes/seconds until
the trainâs departure. The schedule registration function is also
provided to notify you of the departure time by sounding an
alarm. You can update the timetable from the menu, and
search for the nearest station using the GPS function.
You are separately charged a packet communication fee.
For details, refer to âăăŤă (Help)â in the menu.
Powered by JR Travel Navigator
i-Îąppli/i-Widget
Software listćĺťčĄ¨ăŚăŁă¸ă§ăă (Timetable Widget)
Read âĺ
貏äşé
(Exemption clause)â thoroughly
i(
Select an item.
é§
ĺĺ
ĽĺďźćĺťčĄ¨çťé˛ (Enter station name/Store timetable)
. . . .Stores the timetable of the station you want to use.
ĺ
¨ä˝č¨ĺŽďźăăŤăďźĺ
貏äşé
(Whole setting/Help/Exemption clause)
. . . .Sets a font size, and displays âăăŤă (Help)â and âĺ
貏äşé
(Exemption
clause)â.
ă˘ăăŞçľäş (End application)
. . . .Ends this application.
ćĽčąçďźćĽä¸ç ăăăšăŁăŚçżťč¨ł for P
(J-E/J-C Speech Translation for P)
Just by speaking a phrase to be translated into your FOMA
terminal, this application program translates it from Japanese
to English or Chinese and vice versa.
You can use all the functions charge free for 60 days from
when you start using this application program. Some phrases
available for translation are restricted on and after the 61st
day. To use all the services, you need to register in My Menu
(charged) from the âăăăšăŁăŚçżťč¨ł (Speech Translation)â
site by ATR-Trek Co., Ltd. (in Japanese only)
[How to access: iMenuâăĄăăĽăźăŞăšă (Menu List)
âčžć¸ďźĺŚçżďźäžżĺŠăăźăŤ (Dictionary/Study/
Convenient Tool)âčžć¸ďźçżťč¨ł (Dictionary/Translation)
âăăăšăŁăŚçżťč¨ł (Speech Translation)]
You are separately charged a packet communication fee.
The display is for
J-E version.
Š ATR-Trek
Software list
ćĽčąăăăšăŁăŚçżťč¨ł_P (J-E Speech Translation_P) or
ćĽä¸ăăăšăŁăŚçżťč¨ł_P (J-C Speech Translation_P)
SKIP
Select âćĽčąăăăšăŁăŚçżťč¨ł_P (J-E Speech Translation_P)â for using J-E
version, or select âćĽä¸ăăăšăŁăŚçżťč¨ł_P (J-C Speech Translation_P)â for using
J-C version.
Read âăăăšăŁăŚçżťč¨łă¨ăŻ (What is Speech
Translation?)â and âăĺŠç¨čŚç´ (Usage rules)â
thoroughlyĺćăă (Agree)
You need to agree with âăĺŠç¨čŚç´ (Usage rules)â when you use the program
for the first time.
Read âăĺŠç¨ćł¨ćäşé
(Cautions in use)â thoroughly
OKăŻă (YES)
If you select âăăă (NO)â, âăăăšăŁăŚçżťč¨łă¨ăŻ (What is Speech
Translation?)â, âăĺŠç¨čŚç´ (Usage rules)â, and âăĺŠç¨ćł¨ćäşé
(Cautions in
use)â do not appear when you start the program next time.
278
ăŻă (YES)OK
âă˘ăăŞăŽä˝żăćš (How to use application)â appears at the first startup.
5
Select a menu item.
ćĽâčą çżťč¨ł (Translate Japanese to English)
. . . Starts translation from Japanese to English.
čąâćĽ çżťč¨ł (Translate English to Japanese)
. . . Starts translation from English to Japanese.
ćĽâä¸ çżťč¨ł (Translate Japanese to Chinese)
. . . Starts translation from Japanese to Chinese.
ä¸âćĽ çżťč¨ł (Translate Chinese to Japanese)
. . . Starts translation from Chinese to Japanese.
ăˇăźăłăĺ¤ć´ (Change scene)
. . . Select a scene suitable for words to be translated.
Press i to switch between Japanese and English or Chinese.
GăŹă¤ăçŞçľčĄ¨ăŞă˘ăłăł (G Guide Program List Remote Control)
About timer recording function
You can select a program you want to record and set a timer recording from the program
list of this application program.
How to set a timer recording
1. Software listGăŹă¤ăçŞçľčĄ¨ăŞă˘ăłăł (G Guide Program List Remote Control)
Highlight a program to be set for a timer recording and press i(
âŻăŻăłăťă°é˛çťäşç´ (1Seg timer recording)äşç´ĺŽčĄ (Execute booking)
Operate following the instructions on the display.
(You can set a timer recording also by highlighting a program and pressing s.)
About remote timer recording function
If you have a DVD recorder, etc. that supports the remote timer recording function, you
can set timer recordings from the program list of this application program over the
Internet even if you are away.
For remote timer recording, you need to make initial settings of this application program.
How to make initial settings
1. Set the Internet connection for the DVD recorder, etc.
(Refer to the instruction manual of the DVD recorder, etc. you use.)
2. Software listGăŹă¤ăçŞçľčĄ¨ăŞă˘ăłăł (G Guide Program List Remote Control)
i(
)ăŞă˘ăźăé˛çťäşç´ (Remote timer recording)
Operate following the guidance.
How to set timer recordings
After the initial settings, specify your desired program and select âăŞă˘ăźăé˛çťäşç´
(Remote timer recording)â. Then, the DVD recorder, etc. specified on this application
program is connected via the Internet, and you can set timer recordings.
You are separately charged a packet communication fee.
279
i-Îąppli/i-Widget
This is a convenient i-Îąppli program that bundles the TV
program list and AV remote control function and the
monthly charge is free.
Anytime and anywhere you are, you can easily obtain the
terrestrial digital, terrestrial analog or BS digital TV
program information for the desired time zone. You can
know about titles, contents, and start/end times of TV
programs. Further, you can start a 1Seg program from the
program list and vice versa.
If there is any program you want to watch, you can set
timer recordings of the program on a DVD recorder, etc. âťThe display is for
reference. The actual one
over the Internet. (You need to have a DVD recorder, etc.
may differ.
that supports the remote timer recording function. And you
Local programs according
need to perform initial settings of this application
to your region appear on
program.) Further, you can search for the program
your display.
information by keywords such as program genres or
celebrities you like, or pickup keywords on the top of the
display. You can also remote-control a TV, video recorder,
and DVD player. (Some models are not supported.)
See page 362 for details on the infrared remote control.
You need to make the initial settings and to agree with the usage rules for the first time.
You are separately charged a packet communication fee.
To use this application program overseas, set the FOMA terminalâs clock to Japan time.
For details, refer to âMobile Phone Userâs Guide [i-mode] FOMA versionâ.
About TV timer function
You can set 1Seg TV Timer for programs you want to watch by selecting from the
program list of this application program.
How to set TV Timer
1. Software listGăŹă¤ăçŞçľčĄ¨ăŞă˘ăłăł (G Guide Program List Remote Control)
Highlight a program you want set TV Timer for and press i(
čŚč´äşç´ (TV Timer)äşç´ĺŽčĄ (Execute booking)
Operate following the instructions on the display.
iD č¨ĺŽă˘ă㪠(iD appli)
DCMXăŻăŹă¸ăăă˘ă㪠(DCMX credit appli)
i-Îąppli/i-Widget
âiDâ denotes convenient electronic money that makes use of
the credit settlement system. You can easily do shopping by
placing your Osaifu-Keitai with your credit card information set
or your credit card which supports âiDâ over a scanning device
at shops. You can set up to two kinds of credit card information
on Osaifu-Keitai and can use it by shops according to specific
benefit. Depending on the card publishing company, cashing is
also supported.
âťThe display is for reference.
For using âiDâ on Osaifu-Keitai, you need to subscribe to a
The actual one may differ.
card publishing company that supports âiDâ and to set with âiD
č¨ĺŽă˘ăăŞ(iD appli)â or card application provided by the card publishing company.
Depending on the card you use, you need to set with âiD č¨ĺŽă˘ă㪠(iD appli)â and
then set the card application.
The expense (annual fees, etc.) charged for the iD service differs depending on the
card publishing company.
You cannot delete âiD č¨ĺŽă˘ă㪠(iD appli)â. Before you initialize iC owner, perform âiD
ă˘ăăŞĺćĺ (Initialize iD Application)â from âč¨ĺŽăĄăăĽăź (Setting M)â of âiD č¨ĺŽă˘
ă㪠(iD appli)â.
For the information about âiDâ, refer to the i-mode site of âiDâ (in
Japanese only).
i-mode site: iMenuâăĄăăĽăźăŞăšă (Menu List)âăiDă
QR code for
accessing the site
âDCMXâ is a credit service that supports âiDâ and offered by
NTT DOCOMO, INC. DCMX provides DCMX mini that enables
you to use up to ÂĽ10,000 per month and respective DCMX/
DCMX GOLD services that enable you to use more amount
and save up DOCOMO points.
With âDCMX miniâ, you can easily make a subscription from
this application program and immediately use Mobile Phone
Credit.
âťThe display is for reference.
The actual one may differ.
Subscribing for membership/Screening âť1
Setting card information
Use
Check
No troublesome deposit is required!
Just by placing the mobile phone with the
card information setting completed, at a
shop where the following iD mark is put
up, you can enjoy shopping without
signingâť2.
You can check, on the application
program, the service contents of DCMX,
the balance for this monthâť3, and
detailed account!
Change
You can perform setting from the
application program when changing
models or updating your validity period.
âť1 The online screening is conducted at your subscription for DCMX mini. For
subscribing to a service other than âDCMX miniâ, you are connected to the
subscription page for i-mode.
âť2 You might be required to enter your pin number under certain conditions.
âť3 Available for DCMX mini only.
280
For service contents and details of subscriptions, refer to the
i-mode site of DCMX (in Japanese only).
ăťi-mode site: iMenuâDCMX iD
ă˘ăă¤ăŤGoogleăăă (Google Map for Mobile)
QR code for
accessing the site
On the map, you can easily find out area information, shop
information, and the contents created by users. You can switch
to the aerial photo mode or view the map by Street View. You
can also check the transportation to the destination by the line
search and navigate yourself to the destination.
Information
âćŞč¨ĺŽ (Unset)â or â
â is displayed on the Software list until the card information
setting is completed.
To start this application program for the first time, you need to agree with âăĺŠç¨ä¸ăŽ
注ć (Cautions in use)â.
You are charged a packet communication fee for settings and operations.
â Cautions on Osaifu-Keitai compatible i-Îąppli
Note that we take no responsibility for any information set on your IC card.
Š 2009 Google - Map data Š 2009 ZENRIN
â About the Map display
l: Displays the menu.
i: Searches. (Searches shops in the area, service information, and other places to
show on the map.)
Mo: Moves the cursor.
2: Switches map/aerial photo.
3: Zoom in
0: Shows the current location.
a: Saves to/Displays from bookmark.
You need to agree to the usage rules when you use it for the first time.
You are separately charged a packet communication fee. You are advised to subscribe
to Pake-hodai, Pake-hodai full or Pake-hodai double for using this software program.
For details, refer to âăăŤă (Help)â in the menu.
281
i-Îąppli/i-Widget
Oo: Context menu [çžĺ¨ĺ°ăŽä˝ć (Postal address of current location),
ăăăžă§ăŽçľčˇŻ (Route up to here), ăăăăăŽçľčˇŻ (Route from here),
ăšăăŞăźăăăĽăź (Street view), ăć°ăŤĺ
ĽăăŤäżĺ (Bookmark),
äťčżăć¤ç´˘ (Search the vicinity)]
1: Zoom out
i-Îąppli/i-Widget
ă˘ăă¤ăŤSuicaçťé˛ç¨ď˝ă˘ă㪠(Mobile Suica Setup i-Îąppli)
âă˘ăă¤ăŤSuicaçťé˛ç¨ď˝ă˘ă㪠(Mobile Suica Setup i-Îąppli)â
is the i-Îąppli program NTT DOCOMO provides for making
initial settings required before you use the Osaifu-Keitai
compatible service, âMobile Suicaâ, offered by JR East. Make
the initial settings on this application program, and follow the
online instructions to download the Suica application from the
JR East site and subscribe to it.
You need to agree with âă注ćäşé
ďźĺż
čŞďź[Cautions (Must âťThe display is for reference.
The actual one may differ.
read)]â when you use this program for the first time.
You are separately charged a packet communication fee.
You can delete this application program after completing initial settings, but the area
within the IC card you set remains occupied. To use the occupied area for other
services, you need to initialize all the data in the IC card (full format, hereafter).
You need to visit a docomo shop to perform a full format.
All the data files on the IC card are deleted by the full format.
When you use Mobile Suica Service after a full format, you need to make initial settings
again using this i-Îąppli program.
For the information about Mobile Suica, refer to the i-mode site (in Japanese only).
i-mode site: iMenu âăĄăăĽăźăŞăšă (Menu List)
â ăăľă¤ăăąăźăżă¤ (Osaifu-Keitai)
â 寞ĺżăľăźăăš (Compatible services) â ă˘ăă¤ăŤSuica (Mobile Suica)
âMobile Suicaâ is a registered trademark of East Japan Railway Company.
282
ď˝ă˘ăăżăźăĄăźăŤăź (i-Avatar Maker)
What you can do with i-Avatar Maker
â Create avatars
You can easily create avatars by using various parts prepared
by i-Avatar Maker. You can create avatars viewing the images
shot by the camera or stored in Data Box, or can create
avatars based on the prepared samples.
â Use avatars
You can use the created avatars by converting to the materials
for Deco-mail, Deco-mail pictograms, Decome-Anime, or the
Machi-chara images which support i-concier.
By registering the created avatars on the i-avatar site, you can
change their clothes and publicize them on the competition
site.
Š 2009 Acrodea, Inc./
You are separately charged a packet communication fee for
Š eitarosoft
converting avatars to Decome-Anime templates or
âťThe display is for reference.
Machi-chara images.
The actual one may differ.
You are separately charged a packet communication fee for
registering avatars on the i-avatar sites.
You might need to purchase items for changing their clothes on the i-avatar site.
i-avatar is a trademark of D2 COMMUNICATIONS.
âAvatar Makerâ is a trademark of ACRODEA, Inc.
漽ăŞăŻâă˘ă㪠(Rakuoku â Application)
ĺ°ĺłă˘ă㪠(Map Application)
â漽ăŞăŻâă˘ă㪠(Rakuoku â Application)â enables you to
easily exhibit your goods on Rakuoku whenever you want
wherever you are. The instruction guides you through
exhibition procedures, and you can make âä˝é¨ĺşĺ (trial
entries)â, so you can use it easily even if you are a beginner.
As the âăăăăĺ
Ľĺ (Easy entering)â function and the
convenient functions such as shooting/editing photos and
saving records are available, you can exhibit your goods in a
âťThe display is for reference.
shorter time than you do on sites.
The actual one may differ.
You need to agree with âĺŠç¨čŚç´ (Usage rules)â when you
use this program for the first time.
You are separately charged a packet communication fee.
For details on Rakuoku, refer to âMobile Phone Userâs Guide [i-mode] FOMA versionâ.
To exhibit on Rakuoku, you need to subscribe to the Rakuten membership and register
on My menu.
For the information about Rakuoku, refer to i-mode site (in Japanese only).
i-mode site: iMenuâăŞăźăŻăˇă§ăł (Auction)
â Widget Appli Supported (see page 290)
The information of the goods recommended by Rakuoku or the
goods you exhibit/bid for is displayed, so you can easily check
the auction state.
ď˝ă˘ăăŞăăłăăłă° (i-Îąppli Banking)
i-Îąppli Banking is an i-Îąppli program that enables you to
conveniently use mobile banking (check your account balance
and deposit/withdrawal details, and transfer/shift money, etc.)
from your FOMA terminal. You can use up to two financial
institutions by entering your specified password at the startup
of the i-Îąppli program. You can pay bills/payment notices also
by Pay-easy.
To use mobile banking on i-Îąppli Banking, you need to have
âťThe display is for reference.
the bank account and subscribe to the Internet banking
The actual one may differ.
service of each bank.
You are separately charged a packet communication fee.
For details on i-Îąppli Banking, refer to âMobile Phone Userâs Guide [i-mode] FOMA
versionâ.
For the information about i-Îąppli Banking, refer to i-mode site (in Japanese only).
i-mode site: iMenuâăĄăăĽăźăŞăšă (Menu List)
âă˘ăă¤ăŤăăłăăłă° (Mobile Banking)
â
ď˝ă˘ăăŞăăłăăłă° (i-Îąppli Banking)
QR code for
accessing the site
â Widget Appli Supported (see page 290)
With i-Îąppli Banking Widget, you can easily start i-Îąppli
Banking by entering your password on the Widget display, and
can use your registered financial institutions and optional
functions more conveniently.
283
i-Îąppli/i-Widget
QR code for
accessing the site
This is a convenient i-Îąppli program that enables you to read the map of the place you
are currently in or you specify, check area information, or navigate yourself to the
destination by using the location information. You can search for information of facilities
which are useful in a time of disaster. Further, using Chizu Talk function, you can
exchange messages with your friends on the map.
See page 307 for details on operations.
Start! ď˝ăŚăŁă¸ă§ăă (Start! i-Widget)
âStart! ď˝ăŚăŁă¸ă§ăă (Start! i-Widget)â is an application
program that enables you to watch how to use i-Widget
through a moving picture.
Further, you can access and display the i-mode site where you
can download application programs other than the ones stored
in the FOMA terminal.
You are charged a packet communication fee when you
âťThe display is for reference.
select âăăŚăłăăźă (Download)â and access i-mode.
The actual one may differ.
i-Îąppli/i-Widget
ăăŻăăăŤă ăăŻăăă˘ăăŞ
(McDonaldâs TOKUSURU KEITAI application)
You can quickly check the attractive information such as
McDonaldâs new products. You can download âăăăăŻăźă
ăł (Coupon for scanning)â, the discount coupon usable in
McDonaldâs shops.
Before using âăăăăŻăźăăł (Coupon for scanning)â, you
need to subscribe on âăăŻăăăąăźăżă¤ăľă¤ă (TOKUSURU
KEITAI site)â. Then, select/set your favorite coupon from the
application, and place it over a scanning device at a
Š 2009 McDonaldâs
McDonaldâs shop.
For the information about âăăŻăăăŤă ăăŻăăă˘ăăŞ
âťThe display is for reference.
The actual one may differ.
(McDonaldâs TOKUSURU KEITAI application)â, refer to
âăăŻăăăąăźăżă¤ăľă¤ă (TOKUSURU KEITAI site)â, the McDonaldâs official site (in
Japanese only).
i-mode site:iMenu â ăĄăăĽăźăŞăšă (Menu List) â ă°ăŤăĄďźăŹăˇă (Gourmet/
Recipe) â ăăŻăăăŤă
ăăŻăă (McDonald
TOKUSURU)
âăăăăŻăźăăł (Coupon for scanning)â is not available at the shops in some area. In
those areas, âčŚăăăŻăźăăł (Coupon for showing)â is available.
Even if you have not subscribed to âăăŻăăăąăźăżă¤ăľă¤ă (TOKUSURU KEITAI
site)â, you can browse âăăăăć
ĺ ą (Recommendation news)â.
The functions and service contents of âăăŻăăăŤă ăăŻăăă˘ă㪠(McDonaldâs
TOKUSURU KEITAI application)â are subject to change.
You are separately charged a packet communication fee.
Start the application
Select a coupon and the number of sheets you use
Press âćąşĺŽ (OK)â to complete the setting of coupon information
Order by placing the coupon over a scanning device at a shop.
â Widget Appli Supported (See page 290)
When McDonaldâs âăăăăć
ĺ ą (Recommendation news)â is
updated, the McDonaldâs signboard of Widget Appli turns
around to tell you the update.
When you select the signboard, âăăăăć
ĺ ą
(Recommendation news)â is displayed.
You can read more detailed information by pressing
âăăŁă¨čŠłăă (More detail)â in âăăăăć
ĺ ą
(Recommendation news)â.
iWăŚăŠăă (iW Watch)
âiWăŚăŠăă (iW Watch)â application enables you to check a
watch or battery level on a graphical i-Widget.
You can change the designs and colors according to your
taste.
âťThe display is for reference.
The actual one may differ.
284
ć ŞäžĄă˘ă㪠(Stock Prices Application)
Type of index
âć ŞäžĄă˘ă㪠(Stock Prices Application)â
enables you to easily check stock prices (Nikkei225/TOPIX/
Hercules index)
on i-Widget.
The stock prices index you can check
Chart
are: Nikkei225, TOPIX, and Hercules
Present index
index.
value
You can check the present index value
and its up/down from the day before.
Change of index
âťThe display is for reference.
You can switch the charts among âćĽä¸čśł
The actual one may differ.
(intraday)â, âćĽčśł (daily)â, âéąčśł (weekly)â,
and âćčśł (monthly)â.
You need to agree with âĺŠç¨čŚç´ (Usage rules)â when you use this program for the
first time.
You are separately charged a packet communication fee.
The present index value is the information with a delay of about 20 minutes.
The information from this application program is not for buying/selling stocks nor for
supporting them.
We take all possible measures to ensure the contents of information of this application
program, but this does not provide guarantees to the contents. Note that we at
DOCOMO and the Information Provider cannot be held responsible for the loss due to
the information from this application program.
âFOMA é俥ç°ĺ˘ç˘şčŞă˘ă㪠(FOMA Communication
Environment Check Application)â enables you to check
whether the FOMA terminal is available at the FOMA
High-Speed Area.
Use âFOMA é俥ç°ĺ˘ç˘şčŞă˘ă㪠(FOMA Communication
Environment Check Application)â with your consent to âăĺŠ
ç¨ăŽćł¨ć (Cautions in use)â.
Depending on the communication environment (such as
weather, radio wave conditions, network congestion state) at âťThe display is for reference.
communication environment check, the different result or âout
The actual one may differ.
of serviceâ might appear even in the same area or at the
same period of time.
You might not be able to check correctly if you use another function while using this
application program.
Setting i-Îąppli
mi-ÎąppliiÎąppli settings
Do the following operations.
Auto start setting
See page 286.
Disp. software info
See page 271.
i-Widget roaming set.
See page 292.
i-Widget sound effect
See page 292.
i-Îąppli/i-Widget
Googleă˘ăă¤ăŤ (Google Mobile)
âGoogleă˘ăă¤ăŤ (Google Mobile)â is a useful application
program that enables you to use the mobile web search
function. You can easily enter the trendy words and keywords
you entered in the past. You can easily call up the helpful
Google services such as Mail Service (Gmail) and Train Route
Search.
You are separately charged a packet communication fee.
FOMA é俥ç°ĺ˘ç˘şčŞă˘ăăŞ
(FOMA Communication Environment Check Application)
iÎąppli call settings
âťThe display is for reference.
The actual one may differ.
iÎąppli call DL set. See page 288.
iÎąppli call sound See page 288.
285
Preferred tone
ÎąBacklight
ÎąPower saver
i-Îąppli/i-Widget
ÎąVibrator
Check settings
You can set which sound to be output preferentially, from
MUSIC/1Seg or i-Îąppli program, for when you start an i-Îąppli
program during music playback or use of 1Seg.
MUSIC/1Seg or iÎąppli
You can set the backlight operation for when an i-Îąppli
program is running.
Select an item.
Depend on system . . . . .Follows the setting of âBacklightâ.
Depend on software . . . . Follows the setting of each
software program.
Constant light . . . . . . . . .Lights constantly.
You can set to Power Saver Mode to decrease battery
consumption by temporarily suspending the i-Îąppli program
for when you close the FOMA terminal while i-Îąppli is running.
ON or OFF
This setting is valid from when you start an i-Îąppli program to
when you exit it.
Even when this function is set to âONâ, Power Saver Mode
becomes invalid if âPower saverâ that can be set for each
i-Îąppli program is set to âOFFâ.
You can set the vibrator operation for when an i-Îąppli program
is running.
Depend on system or Depend on software
Depend on system . . . . .Does not work regardless of the
setting of âVibratorâ. With some
software programs, the vibrator
works.
Depend on software . . . . Follows the setting of each
software program.
You can check each of âiÎąppli settingsâ.
Information
<ÎąBacklight> <ÎąVibrator>
With some software programs, the backlight and vibrator settings are âOFFâ.
Consequently, if you set âDepend on softwareâ, the backlight and vibrator will not
work; if you want them to work, set âDepend on systemâ.
286
Starting i-Îąppli Automatically
You can make an i-Îąppli program start automatically at the set date and
time. Set the date and time for automatic start using Auto Start Time.
Auto Start Setting
You can set whether to enable automatic start of i-Îąppli programs.
mi-ÎąppliiÎąppli settingsAuto start setting
ON or OFF
Auto Start Time
You can set the date and time for automatic start. You can set for up to
three software programs.
Software listi(
Select start timeEnter the date and time to be set.
)Auto start time
Put a check mark for an item to be setl(
Time interval set . . . . Starts at an interval specified by the software program. The
setting is completed.
Start time set . . . . . . . Starts at the set start time automatically.
1 timeSelect a type of repeat.
If you select âWeeklyâ, put a check mark for days of the week to be set and press
l(
).
Press l(
).
Auto Start Info
You can check whether a software program has started automatically
and properly. Also, you can check the information of start failure from IC
card. Up to three records of automatic start, a record of automatic start
set by i-Îąppli, and a record of start failure from IC card are stored.
mi-ÎąppliiÎąppli infoAuto start info
StartO . . . . .Started automatically and properly.
StartX. . . . . .Did not start automatically.
When â
â is displayed, you can press Oo(
software program.
Startâ. . . . . .Has not started yet.
Send i-Îąppli Calls to Call up Members
While an i-Îąppli program which supports i-Îąppli call is
runningMake an i-Îąppli callYES
The operation differs depending on the i-Îąppli program.
Receive i-Îąppli Calls
) to start the
Information
Using i-Îąppli Call
With the i-Îąppli call function, you can call up your friends on the i-Îąppli
program to have online matches and to share the information with them.
The i-Îąppli call confirmation display appears
Select an item.
Accept . . . . . . . Answers the i-Îąppli call. The target i-Îąppli program starts.
Reject. . . . . . . . Rejects the i-Îąppli call.
Hold . . . . . . . . . Holds the i-Îąppli call. â
â appears at the top of the display, and
â
â appears on the desktop. Press Oo, highlight â
â and
press Oo to show the i-Îąppli call logs.
Some i-Îąppli calls activate the i-Îąppli program without showing the confirmation
display.
When you answer an i-Îąppli call, you might be charged a packet communication
fee.
While a display other than the Stand-by display is shown, only â
â tells you
the arrival of i-Îąppli calls.
When the target i-Îąppli program is already running, the operation varies
depending on the i-Îąppli program.
When the target i-Îąppli program is not found on the FOMA
terminal when you select âAcceptâ
The confirmation display might appear asking whether to download the target i-Îąppli
program or to access a site. Select âYESâ to download it or to access the site. Select
âNOâ to return to the Stand-by display. In this case, âAcceptâ is recorded on the i-Îąppli call
log.
With i-Îąppli calls, you are called up in two ways; directly by your friend or by the IP
(Information Service Providers).
Rejecting all i-Îąppli calls is also available.
For details, refer to âMobile Phone Userâs Guide [i-mode] FOMA versionâ.
287
i-Îąppli/i-Widget
Software programs do not start automatically in the following cases:
ăťWhen the FOMA terminal is turned off
ăťWhen the date and time are not set
ăťWhen another function is working
ăťDuring Lock All
ăťDuring Personal Data Lock
ăťDuring playback of animations/Flash movies
ăťWhen the time set for automatic start is identical to the reserved time set for
âSoftware updateâ, or the time set for an alarm of âAlarmâ, âScheduleâ, âToDoâ, âTV
timerâ, or âTimer recordingâ
ăťWhen a start time has been specified to the same software program within 10
minutes from the previous auto-start
If automatic start fails, â
â appears on the desktop. Select the icon to show the
Auto Start Info.
When an i-Îąppli call comes in, the i-Îąppli call ring tone sounds and the
confirmation display appears asking whether to answer it.
Check i-Îąppli Call Logs
You can set whether to reject the i-Îąppli download notice for when a
target i-Îąppli program for i-Îąppli calls is not found.
After 30 i-Îąppli calls are received, the older log is automatically deleted from the oldest
one, but the logs for the held i-Îąppli calls are not deleted. (If 30 logs are all for the held
calls, they are deleted.)
mi-ÎąppliiÎąppli call logs
: Held i-Îąppli calls (not replied)
: Answered i-Îąppli calls
: Rejected i-Îąppli calls
: Expired i-Îąppli calls
Highlight a log for a held i-Îąppli call and press
Oo(
) to show again the confirmation display for
the i-Îąppli call. (See âReceive i-Îąppli Callsâ on page 287)
To delete i-Îąppli call logs, press i(
), select âDelete thisâ or âDelete allâ,
and then select âYESâ. When you select âDelete allâ, you need to enter your
Terminal Security Code.
Setting i-Îąppli Call
i-Îąppli/i-Widget
i-Îąppli Call Download Setting
Up to 30 received i-Îąppli calls are recorded in i-Îąppli call logs, and you
can check how they were replied.
Software Setting (i-Îąppli Call)
You can set whether to allow each i-Îąppli program to start from i-Îąppli
calls. When you set to âOFFâ, you cannot receive i-Îąppli calls for the set
i-Îąppli program.
Software listi(
)Software setting
iÎąppli callSelect an iteml(
ON . . . . . . . . . . .Allows to start i-Îąppli programs from i-Îąppli calls.
OFF . . . . . . . . . .Does not start i-Îąppli programs from i-Îąppli calls.
Even if you set to âOFFâ, it might not become valid depending on the i-Îąppli
program.
288
mi-ÎąppliiÎąppli settingsiÎąppli call settings
iÎąppli call DL set.Rejector Not reject
i-Îąppli Call Sound
You can set the operation for when an i-Îąppli call is received.
mi-ÎąppliiÎąppli settingsiÎąppli call settings
iÎąppli call soundDo the following operations.
Select ring tone
Select a folderSelect a ring tone.
While selecting a ring tone, you can check the selected tone.
Ring time setting
You can set a ring time for i-Îąppli call ring tone.
Enter a ring time (seconds).
Enter two digits from â00â through â15â.
Select vibrator
Select a vibration pattern.
If you select âMelody linkageâ, the FOMA terminal vibrates in
time with ring tone.
While selecting a vibration pattern, you can check the selected
vibration.
Select illumination Select an item.
While selecting an item, you can check the lighting/flickering of
the Call/Charging indicator.
Operating i-Îąppli Stand-by Display
Software Setting (Stand-by Set)
You can set an i-Îąppli program for the Stand-by display. Once set, the
i-Îąppli Stand-by display automatically appears each time you show the
Stand-by display.
Software listi(
)Software setting
Stand-by setON or OFFl(
â
â is displayed for the software program set as the Stand-by display.
â
â or â
â is displayed while an i-Îąppli Stand-by display is running.
To operate an i-Îąppli program as a normal i-Îąppli program
when an i-Îąppli Stand-by display is running
Information
If you turn off the FOMA terminal while the i-Îąppli Stand-by display is running, the
confirmation display appears asking whether to start the i-Îąppli program when you
turn on the power again.
You can set only one software program for the i-Îąppli Stand-by display.
Some i-Îąppli programs cannot be set for the Stand-by display.
With some software programs set as the i-Îąppli Stand-by display, you can press a key
to go from the normal i-Îąppli status to the i-Îąppli Stand-by display status. However,
you cannot return to the i-Îąppli Stand-by display if another menu function is running.
Note that you might not be able to receive timely information if you have set âStand-by
netâ of âSoftware settingâ to âOFFâ.
You cannot use the Web To function and the Phone To/AV Phone To function from
the i-Îąppli Stand-by display.
If the software program which connects to the network is set for the i-Îąppli Stand-by
display, it might not operate successfully because of radio wave conditions or other
factors.
Software Setting (Stand-by Net)
You can set whether to permit communication for when the i-Îąppli
Stand-by display is running.
Software listi(
)Software setting
Stand-by netON or OFFl(
End Stand-by Display
You can temporarily end the running i-Îąppli Stand-by display. Also, you
can release the i-Îąppli Stand-by display.
mSet./ServiceDisplayDisplay setting
Stand-by displayEnd iÎąppli display
End or Terminate
When you select âTerminateâ, select âYESâ.
289
i-Îąppli/i-Widget
From the i-Îąppli Stand-by display, press <.
â
â or â
â changes to a blinking â
â or â
â and then you can operate the i-Îąppli
program as a normal one.
To return to the i-Îąppli Stand-by display, press and hold r for at least one second or
press h; then select âEndedâ. To release the i-Îąppli Stand-by display, select
âTerminatedâ, and select âYESâ.
Information
When you show the Stand-by display while a menu function is operating, the image
set for âStand-by displayâ of âDisplay settingâ is displayed, even when the i-Îąppli
Stand-by display is set.
When the communication is extremely frequent in a certain period of time while an
i-Îąppli program is running as the i-Îąppli Stand-by display, the confirmation display
appears. When you press .<, the confirmation display appears asking whether to
continue communication.
When you close the FOMA terminal, the display shifts to the pause state regardless of
âÎąPower saverâ or âPower saverâ of the Function menu.
If you set Lock All or Personal Data Lock when the i-Îąppli Stand-by display is shown,
the i-Îąppli Stand-by display ends. If you set Lock All, the image set for âStand-by
displayâ of âDisplay settingâ is displayed and if you set Personal Data Lock, the default
Stand-by display is displayed. The i-Îąppli Stand-by display returns when you release
each lock. However, when âDisplay settingâ is set to âAcceptâ for âCustomizeâ of
Personal Data Lock, the Stand-by display you had set before you set the i-Îąppli
Stand-by display is displayed during Personal Data Lock.
End Stand-by Info
When the i-Îąppli Stand-by display does not end successfully, you can
check the date/time and its reason.
mi-ÎąppliiÎąppli infoEnd stand-by info
When â
â is displayed on the End Stand-by Info display, press
i(
), and select âCopy infoâ to copy the information. Select âDelete infoâ,
and select âYESâ to delete the information.
Displaying i-Îąppli Data Files on the
microSD Card
Depending on the i-Îąppli program, you can save its data files on the
microSD card.
You can display the i-Îąppli data files saved on the microSD card.
mi-ÎąppliiÎąppli(microSD)iÎąppli data
i-Îąppli/i-Widget
Delete folder
290
Multiple Widget Appli programs might communicate when you show the i-Widget
display.
You are separately charged a packet communication fee for downloading Widget Appli
programs or showing the i-Widget display.
As for overseas use, you are charged a packet communication fee each time a Widget
Appli program communicates. Further, the packet communication fee for the overseas
use differs from the one for the domestic fee. For details, refer to âMobile Phone Userâs
Guide [International Services]â or the DOCOMO Global Service website.
For details on i-Widget, refer to âMobile Phone Userâs Guide [i-mode] FOMA versionâ.
â Widget Appli list
ăăłăŞăŽć°çŹ (SUDOKU of NIKOLI)
Function Menu while i-Îąppli Data File is Displayed
Folder info
i-Widget
i-Widget is a useful function that enables you to access the
frequently-used contents such as the calculator, clock, and stock price
information (Widget Appli) by pressing the i-Widget key (r).
You can add Widget Appli programs by downloading from sites offered
by IPs (Information Providers). (See page 270)
Also, you can paste multiple (up to eight) Widget Appli programs to the
i-Widget display to customize it to your taste.
See page 276
NIKKEI NET
See page 277
ăăĄăăŞăźäźč¨ćż (Family Message Board)
See page 277
You can display the information of the software program that uses
the selected folder, available/unavailable for folder usage, and the
reason if unavailable.
ćĺťčĄ¨ăŚăŁă¸ă§ăă (Timetable Widget)
See page 278
漽ăŞăŻâă˘ă㪠(Rakuoku â Application)
See page 283
ĺ°ĺłă˘ă㪠(Map Application)
See page 283
You can delete the selected folder and files in the folder.
Enter your Terminal Security CodeYES
ď˝ă˘ăăŞăăłăăłă° (i-Îąppli Banking)
See page 283
Start! ď˝ăŚăŁă¸ă§ăă (Start! i-Widget)
See page 284
ăăŻăăăŤă ăăŻăăă˘ăăŞ
(McDonaldâs TOKUSURU KEITAI application)
See page 284
iWăŚăŠăă (iW Watch)
See page 284
P-SQUARE INFO
See page 277
äťçŽ (Sticky)
See page 277
ć ŞäžĄă˘ă㪠(Stock Prices Application)
See page 285
Googleă˘ăă¤ăŤ (Google Mobile)
See page 285
â About i-Widget display
Using i-Widget
Start i-Widget
After starting i-Widget, you can simultaneously start multiple Widget
Appli programs. You can show the multiple running Widget Appli
programs on the i-Widget display.
Press r.
i-Widget starts.
When any Widget Appli program is running, the i-Widget
display is displayed. When no Widget Appli program is
running, the Widget Appli list is displayed.
You can start i-Widget also by selecting a Widget Appli
program from the Software list.
Widget Appli list
i-Widget display
Information
Widget Appli operation
display
Widget Appli display
On the Widget Appli list, all Widget Appli programs are displayed and âACTIVEâ is
displayed for the running Widget Appli program.
On the i-Widget display/Widget Appli operation display, each application program is
shown in running state.
: Widget Appli
i-Îąppli/i-Widget
With i-Widget, you can simultaneously start and show up to eight Widget Appli
programs. When you switch Widget Appli programs to be displayed while eight
Widget Appli programs are running, end an unwanted Widget Appli program and then
start another one from the Widget Appli list. See page 292 for ending a Widget Appli
program.
If you have not operated for three minutes from the Widget Appli list or i-Widget
display, the Stand-by display automatically returns. The Stand-by display does not
automatically return from the Widget Appli operation display.
Even if you end i-Widget while a pre-installed Widget Appli program is running and
change the UIM or initialize the FOMA terminal, the Widget Appli program does not
end and remains running as launched from i-Widget.
i-Widget display
: i-Îąppli DX compatible Widget Appli
: Widget Appli for communication
: GPS compatible Widget Appli
: Osaifu-Keitai compatible Widget Appli
: Downloaded from an SSL/TLS page
Navigation display
Navigation that corresponds to the key operation is displayed.
Shuffle i-Widget
You can change the position of Widget Appli programs on the i-Widget
display. You cannot specify each position as it is automatically changed.
i-Widget displayi[ăˇăŁăă㍠(Shuffle)]
291
End i-Widget
You can end i-Widget to return to the Stand-by display.
Widget Appli list/i-Widget display/Widget Appli operation
displayh
You can return to the Stand-by display also by pressing r or
m[ćťă (Return)] from the i-Widget display.
For the Widget Appli operation display, the confirmation display appears asking
whether to finish it.
Starting Widget Appli
You can show the Widget Appli operation display.
You can start a Widget Appli program also by selecting it from the Software list.
You can show the Widget Appli operation display also by selecting a running
Widget Appli program.
You can show the i-Widget display by pressing r or m[ćťă (Return)] from
the Widget Appli operation display.
Setting i-Widget
i-Widget Roaming Setting
You can set whether to communicate via i-Widget overseas.
mi-ÎąppliiÎąppli settingsi-Widget roaming set.
ON or OFF
Information
i-Îąppli/i-Widget
When you arrive at a destination overseas, the setting changes to âOFFâ and the
confirmation display appears when you start i-Widget.
i-Widget Sound Effect
You can set whether to sound an effect tone at the start of i-Widget.
mi-ÎąppliiÎąppli settingsi-Widget sound effect
ON or OFF
Information
The effect tone at the start of i-Widget sounds at the volume set for âPhoneâ of âRing
volumeâ. It sounds at Level 2 when âStepâ is set.
292
Widget Appli list
Select a Widget Appli program to be started.
End Widget Appli
i-Widget display/Widget Appli operation display
Highlight a Widget Appli program to be ended and
press c[ă˘ăăŞçľäş (END Widget Appli)]YES
End Widget Appli Inf
When a Widget Appli program does not end successfully, you can check
the date/time and its reason.
mi-ÎąppliiÎąppli infoEnd Widget appli inf
When â
â is displayed on the End Widget Appli Inf display, press
i(
), and select âCopy infoâ to copy the information. Select âDelete infoâ,
and select âYESâ to delete the information.
Osaifu-Keitai/ToruCa
Osaifu-Keitai . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
iC Transfer Service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Starting Osaifu-Keitai Compatible i-Îąppli
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Locking IC Card Function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Checking Owner Information of IC Card
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
ToruCa . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Receiving ToruCa . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Displaying ToruCa . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
How to See ToruCa File List/Detailed ToruCa File Display . . .
Setting ToruCa . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
294
294
295
296
296
296
297
298
300
303
293
Osaifu-Keitai
Osaifu-Keitai/ToruCa
Osaifu-Keitai mounts the IC card, so you can make payment and others
just by placing the FOMA terminal over the scanning device in a shop.
Further, you can use communications to deposit electronic money or to
check your account for balance or usage histories. Security is fully
secureâť1 so that you can make use with a sense of security.
For details on Osaifu-Keitai, refer to âMobile Phone Userâs Guide [i-mode]
FOMA versionâ.
To use the Osaifu-Keitai compatible service, you need to download the Osaifu-Keitai
compatible i-Îąppli program from the Osaifu-Keitai compatible siteâť2 (in Japanese only)
to make the settings.
âť1 You can use Omakase Lock and IC Card Lock. (See page 115 and page 296)
âť2 iMenuâăĄăăĽăźăŞăšă (Menu List)âăăľă¤ăăąăźăżă¤ (Osaifu-Keitai)
Data on the IC card (including electronic money, reward points, etc.) might be lost or
deformed owing to the malfunction of the FOMA terminal. (When we keep your FOMA
terminal for repair, we cannot keep it with data files left, so the data files shall be
deleted beforehand by yourself as a rule.) For supports such as reissue, restoration,
temporary storage, or transfer of data files, consult the service provider which supports
Osaifu-Keitai, except for the data transfer by iC transfer service. For your important
data files, be sure to use the service with backup support.
In any case including malfunction or model change, we cannot be held responsible for
the loss or deformation of data on the IC card or other losses caused regarding
Osaifu-Keitai compatible services.
If your FOMA terminal is stolen or lost, inquire of the provider for Osaifu-Keitai
compatible service you use about ways of dealing with the trouble, immediately.
294
iC Transfer Service
iC transfer serviceâť1 is the service for movingâť2 a package of data
filesâť3 on the IC card of your Osaifu-Keitai to your new Osaifu-Keitai
when you replace your Osaifu-Keitai such as at the time of phone model
change or malfunction.
After moving data files on the IC card, just downloadâť4 an Osaifu-Keitai
compatible i-Îąppli program, and then you can use the Osaifu-Keitai
services continuously. iC transfer service is available at the service
counters such as a nearby docomo shop.
For details on iC transfer service, refer to âMobile Phone Userâs Guide
[i-mode] FOMA versionâ.
âť1 Both the transferring end and transferred end have to be the FOMA terminal that
supports iC transfer service. Visit a nearby counter such as a docomo shop to use
iC transfer service.
âť2 This service is not for âcopyingâ but for âmovingâ data files, so no data files on the IC
card remain in the FOMA terminal at the transferring end. iC transfer services is not
available for some cases, so use backup services for Osaifu-Keitai compatible
services.
âť3 Some Osaifu-Keitai compatible services do not cover iC transfer service, and you
can move only the files on the IC card of the Osaifu-Keitai compatible service that
covers iC transfer service.
âť4 You are charged a packet communication fee for downloading i-Îąppli programs and
respective settings.
Starting Osaifu-Keitai Compatible i-Îąppli
Read and Write Data inside the IC Card
You can start the Osaifu-Keitai compatible i-Îąppli from the Software list.
By using Osaifu-Keitai compatible i-Îąppli, you can read/write the data
inside the IC card and use convenient functions such as depositing
electronic money or checking your account for the balance and usage
details on the mobile phone.
Take care of your Terminal Security Code and password used for each service not to
reveal to anyone.
When you start or download the Osaifu-Keitai compatible i-Îąppli program for the first
time, the message âUse IC card for current UIM?â appears. When you select âYESâ,
you cannot use the IC card function afterward unless you insert the same UIM.
To use the IC card function with another UIM, delete all the information of the IC card
by âChange IC ownerâ, and then delete all the Osaifu-Keitai compatible i-Îąppli
programs other than âiD č¨ĺŽă˘ă㪠(iD appli)â. Otherwise, you cannot use it.
Reading and writing data from the software program and to the IC card is suspended in
the following cases:
In that case, the read or written data is discarded. The operation after the
communication ends differs depending on the service you use.
ăťWhen a call comes in while an i-Îąppli program is running
ăťWhen the battery goes flat
mOsaifu-KeitaiIC card content
The list of the Osaifu-Keitai compatible i-Îąppli programs is displayed. When you
select an i-Îąppli program, it starts up.
See page 271 for the Software list.
Even during a call or i-mode access, you can use Osaifu-Keitai by placing the f
mark over the scanning device.
Place the f mark of the FOMA terminal over the
scanning device to use the target service.
The Call/Charging indicator lights when you bring your FOMA terminal close to a
scanning device and communication becomes ready.
Place the f mark of the FOMA
terminal over the scanning device.
Information
Mount the battery pack to use Osaifu-Keitai. Even when the power is turned off or
when the battery has gone flat, you can use Osaifu-Keitai by placing the f mark
over the scanning device, however, you cannot start the Osaifu-Keitai compatible
i-Îąppli. You might not be able to use Osaifu-Keitai if you have left the battery unused
for a long period or not charged it after the low battery alarm sounds. Charge the
battery.
When the f mark of the FOMA terminal placed over the scanning device is not
identified, slightly move the mark forwards, backwards, to left, or to right.
Osaifu-Keitai compatible i-Îąppli might start when you place the FOMA terminal over
the scanning device.
295
Osaifu-Keitai/ToruCa
Use Osaifu-Keitai
Place the f mark of the FOMA terminal over the scanning device, and
you can use the FOMA terminal as electronic money to pay for shopping
or to use it as a traffic ticket. This function is available without starting
the software program.
Locking IC Card Function
Checking Owner Information of IC Card
To prevent the IC card function from being used by others, you can set
the Osaifu-Keitai, received ToruCa, or iC communication disabled.
You can check whether IC owner information required for using the IC
card is consistent with the information of the currently inserted UIM.
If the battery runs out while IC Card Lock is set, the IC card stays locked.
Press and hold m for at least one second.
â â appears and IC Card Lock is set.
To release IC Card Lock, perform the same operation and enter your Terminal
Security Code. When Timer Lock ON At Close is set and âLock OFF at openâ is
set to âONâ, the display for releasing IC Card Lock appears also by opening the
FOMA terminal.
IC Lock (Power-off)
You can set whether to lock the IC card function while the power is
turned off.
Osaifu-Keitai/ToruCa
mSet./ServiceLock/SecurityLock setting
or
mOsaifu-KeitaiIC card lock set.
IC lock (power-off)
Enter your Terminal Security CodeSelect an item.
Setting before OFF . . . . Follows the setting just before turning off the power.
Lock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Sets IC Card Lock.
mOsaifu-KeitaiCheck IC owner
When the UIM differs from the stored one, select âChangeâ and reset the data on
the IC card, and then you can newly store the UIM information.
Change IC Owner
You can reset the IC owner information by deleting data on the IC card.
After resetting, you can newly register information of currently inserted
UIM.
When you initialize the IC owner information, the Osaifu-Keitai compatible i-Îąppli
programs except âiD č¨ĺŽă˘ă㪠(iD appli)â are deleted. However, they might not be
deleted depending on your usage state, so you need to delete them separately.
mOsaifu-KeitaiChange IC ownerResetYES
Enter your Terminal Security CodeYES
ToruCa
ToruCa is an electronic card that you can receive with Osaifu-Keitai for
use as fliers, restaurant cards, and coupon tickets.
You can receive ToruCa files from scanning devices or sites and can
easily exchange them using mail, infrared ray, or a microSD card.
The received ToruCa files are saved to âToruCaâ of âOsaifu-Keitaiâ.
For details on ToruCa, refer to âMobile Phone Userâs Guide [i-mode] FOMA versionâ.
296
â Flow for using ToruCa
Receiving ToruCa
Receive from Scanning Device
Place your Osaifu-Keitai over a scanning
device to receive a ToruCa file.
You can receive the ToruCa file from a scanning device using the IC card
function. By receiving detailed information, a ToruCa file becomes a
ToruCa file (details) which has more pieces of information.
For a ToruCa file before receiving the details, you can download up to 1 Kbyte per file,
and for a ToruCa file (details), you can download up to 100 Kbytes per file.
Place the f mark of the FOMA terminal over the
scanning device.
You can view more detailed information by using â芳細 (Details)â key.
â Sources of ToruCa files
When a ToruCa file is received
Scanning device
microSD card
i-Îąppli
Data broadcasting
Data Storage Center
Mail, infrared
communication,
iC communication
Update/Save
ToruCa files to Data
Storage Center.
Exchanges ToruCa
files between
i-mode terminals.
297
Osaifu-Keitai/ToruCa
Site
QR code
A ToruCa-received tone sounds, the Call/Charging indicator lights.
When âRecv. ToruCa displayâ is set to âONâ, detailed display of received ToruCa file
appears.
For a ToruCa file before receiving detailed information, the confirmation display
appears asking whether to connect to a site to download detailed information. Select
âYESâ to display a ToruCa file (details) with detailed information received. Select âNOâ
to display a ToruCa file without detailed information.
If no keys are pressed for about 15 seconds or âRecv. ToruCa displayâ is set to âOFFâ,
â
â appears on the desktop.
Press Oo, highlight â
â, and press Oo(
); then the ToruCa File list appears.
About Auto-reading Function of ToruCa
If you set âAuto reading ToruCaâ to âAcceptâ to use the ToruCa files by placing the FOMA
terminal over the scanning device, the available ToruCa files are automatically
recognized. The used ToruCa files are converted into âUsedâ and then moved to the
âUsed ToruCaâ folder. Up to 20 used ToruCa files are saved, and when the number of
the files exceeds 20, the files are deleted from the one downloaded at the oldest date.
Even if âAuto reading ToruCaâ is set to âRejectâ, the confirmation display might appear
asking whether to use âAuto reading ToruCaâ when you place the FOMA terminal over
the scanning device. To use ToruCa files, select âYESâ, and then set âAuto reading
ToruCaâ to âAcceptâ.
Information
When you fail to receive a ToruCa file, the ToruCa failed-to-received tone sounds,
and the Call/Charging indicator lights.
A ToruCa-received tone and a ToruCa failed-to-receive tone sound at the volume set
for âPhoneâ of âRing volumeâ.
Depending on the settings by IPs (Information Providers), you might not be able to
update ToruCa files or send them by mail or infrared rays.
When receiving detailed information from a ToruCa file
A ToruCa file before receiving detailed information itself does not show the detailed
information. Select â芳細 (Details)â on the ToruCa file display and select âYESâ to
connect to the site to receive more detailed information.
After receiving the detailed information, the ToruCa file is overwritten and saved.
Information
You are charged the ordinary packet fee for receiving.
Function Menu of the ToruCa Folder List
Operate folder
Add folder
You can create a user folder. You can create up to 20 folders.
Enter a folder name.
You can enter up to 10 full-pitch/20 half-pitch characters for
the FOMA terminal.
You can enter up to 31 full-pitch/63 half-pitch characters for
the microSD card.
Edit folder name
You can edit the folder name for the user folder.
Enter a folder name.
You can enter up to 10 full-pitch/20 half-pitch characters for
the FOMA terminal.
You can enter up to 31 full-pitch/63 half-pitch characters for
the microSD card.
Delete folder
All ToruCa files in the folder are deleted.
Enter your Terminal Security CodeYES
Osaifu-Keitai/ToruCa
Displaying ToruCa
You can display ToruCa file received by the IC card function or from sites
or mail.
mOsaifu-KeitaiToruCa
Select a folder.
Each time you press m from the ToruCa Folder list,
ToruCa Folder list
you can switch folders between the FOMA terminal and
the microSD card.
When the folder contains unread ToruCa files, â
â appears.
Select a ToruCa file.
298
Search all folders
Auto-sort
You can search through all ToruCa files in the FOMA terminal
(except ToruCa files stored in the âUsed ToruCaâ folder) by
specifying a search condition.
Select a search condition.
Genre. . . .Select a genre.
Press l(
) to display a list of category
icons belonging to the genre.
Title . . . . .Enter characters to be searched for, from those in
the title.
Index . . . .Enter characters to be searched for, from those in
location data.
You can enter up to 20 full-pitch/40 half-pitch characters for
the Title search, and up to 10 full-pitch/20 half-pitch
characters for the Index search.
You can copy the ToruCa files together with the folder from
the FOMA terminal to the microSD card.
CPY all to microSD You can copy all the ToruCa files together with the folder from
the FOMA terminal to the microSD card.
Enter your Terminal Security CodeYES
Copy to phone
You can copy the ToruCa files together with the folder from
the microSD card to the FOMA terminal.
Copy all to phone
You can copy all the ToruCa files together with the folder from
the microSD card to the FOMA terminal.
Add or OverwriteEnter your Terminal Security Code
YES
When you select âOverwriteâ, the confirmation display
appears telling that the ToruCa files in the FOMA terminal
will be deleted.
Connect to Center
See page 124.
All ToruCa disp.
You can display all the ToruCa files stored in the FOMA
terminal.
Ir/
transmission
Send all Ir data
All
See page 361.
transmission See page 363.
Memory info
You can display the used memory space (estimate)/the
number of saved files.
Delete all
You can delete all the ToruCa files stored in the FOMA
terminal.
Enter your Terminal Security CodeYES
Select storage
You can set a destination folder for when copying from the
FOMA terminal to the microSD card.
YES
Copy
299
Osaifu-Keitai/ToruCa
You can set to automatically sort and save the ToruCa files
that satisfy the conditions set to the folder for when you
receive them from a scanning device or automatically receive
them from data broadcasting while watching a 1Seg program.
Select a sorting condition.
Genre. . . . . Put a check mark for the genre to sort into and
press l(
). You can put it for multiple
genres.
Title . . . . . . Enter characters from those in the title, to be a
sorting condition.
Index . . . . . Enter characters from those in the location data,
to be a sorting condition.
Release . . . Select âYESâ to release the sorting condition you
specified.
You can enter up to 20 full-pitch/40 half-pitch characters for
the Title sort, and up to 10 full-pitch/20 half-pitch characters
for the Index sort.
When a sorting condition is already specified for the folder, it
is displayed. Press i(
) to set a sorting condition
again.
Copy to microSD
Information
â
â is displayed when the Genre sort is set, â
â is displayed when the Title sort is
set, and â
â is displayed when the Index sort is set.
When a file satisfies multiple conditions, it is sorted into the top of the folder in the
ToruCa Folder list.
The ToruCa file (details) is copied as a ToruCa file before receiving details if it
contains the data file with the UIM security or whose output from the FOMA terminal is
prohibited.
The ToruCa files in the âToruCaâ folder within the FOMA terminal are saved to âSD
ToruCaâ on the microSD card.
The ToruCa files in âSD ToruCaâ on the microSD card are added or overwritten and
then saved to the âToruCaâ folder in the FOMA terminal.
â
â is displayed for the folder set as a destination.
When you execute Check microSD, or create or edit a folder by using a personal
computer, the destination folder on the microSD card might be changed. When the
setting is changed, set the destination folder again.
How to See ToruCa File List/Detailed
ToruCa File Display
ToruCa File list
Detailed ToruCa File display Detailed ToruCa File display
(for ToruCa file)
[for ToruCa file (details)]
State of ToruCa file
âť1
Unread ToruCa file
Read ToruCa file
Used ToruCa file
Osaifu-Keitai/ToruCa
âť2
FOMA terminal incompatible ToruCa file
âť1 Does not apply to the ToruCa file downloaded from a site.
âť2 Appears for only the ToruCa file on the microSD card.
â â is added to the expired ToruCa file.
â
â is added to the ToruCa file whose output from the FOMA terminal is prohibited.
Category
Displays a category icon that matches the contents of the ToruCa file.
Index file
Displays the location data of the publisher of the ToruCa file information.
Title
Date and time the ToruCa file was received
ToruCa information
Summary and the â芳細 (Details)â key are displayed for a ToruCa file. Publisher
information is displayed for a ToruCa file (details).
300
Function Menu of the ToruCa File List/Detailed ToruCa File
Display
Attach to mail
Move
You can compose an i-mode mail message with the ToruCa
file attached.
Go to step 2 on page 130.
You can compose it also by pressing l(
).
Connect to Center
[List only]
See page 124.
ToruCa folders
[List only]
You can display the ToruCa folder list.
You can display it also by pressing c(
Multiple-choice
[List only]
You can select multiple ToruCa files and operate them.
Put a check mark for ToruCa files to be selected
i(
)Select an item.
Move . . . . . . . . . . . . . See page 301.
Copy. . . . . . . . . . . . . . See page 301.
Copy to microSD . . . See page 301.
Copy to phone . . . . . See page 301.
Send Ir data. . . . . . . . See page 360.
Select all . . . . . . . . . . Selects all files.
Release all. . . . . . . . . Releases all selections.
Update ToruCa
[Detailed display only]
You can re-receive the information about the ToruCa file. The
re-received ToruCa file (details) is automatically overwritten
and then saved.
YES
You cannot update some ToruCa files.
See page 194 when ToruCa files are stored to the
maximum.
Select a destination folder.
You cannot select the âUsed ToruCaâ folder.
Search/sort
Search
[List only]
You can change the order of displayed files.
Select an order.
Copy
Copy
You can copy the displayed or highlighted ToruCa file to
another folder.
Select a destination folder.
You cannot select the âUsed ToruCaâ folder.
Copy to microSD
The files are copied to the folder as specified by âSelect
storageâ on page 299.
Copy to phone
You can copy the ToruCa file from the microSD card to the
ToruCa folder in the FOMA terminal.
Operate image
Save one image
You can save an image displayed on the ToruCa file.
[Detailed display only] Select an image
Go to step 2 on page 192.
Save some images You can save multiple images displayed on the ToruCa file.
[Detailed display only] Put a check mark for images to be savedl(
Go to step 2 on page 192.
Save all images
Among the images displayed on the ToruCa file, you can save
[Detailed display only] all the images that can be saved at one time.
Go to step 2 on page 192.
Save BG image
You can save the background image of the ToruCa file and
[Detailed display only] set it for the Stand-by display or Wake-up display.
Go to step 2 on page 192.
301
Osaifu-Keitai/ToruCa
Sort
[List only]
You can search through ToruCa file in the folder by specifying
a search condition.
Select a search condition.
Genre. . . .Select a genre.
Press l(
) to display a list of category
icons belonging to the genre.
Title . . . . .Enter characters to be searched for, from those in
the title.
Index . . . .Enter characters to be searched for, from those in
location data.
You can enter up to 20 full-pitch/40 half-pitch characters for
the Title search, and up to 10 full-pitch/20 half-pitch
characters for the Index search.
).
Retry
You can play back an animation image or Flash movie in the
[Detailed display only] ToruCa file from the beginning.
When a part of the Flash movie is outside the display area,
the Flash movie might not be played back.
Add to phonebook
[Detailed display only]
See page 82.
Add desktop icon
See page 30.
Ir/
transmission
Send Ir data
transmission
Memory info
[List only]
See page 360.
See page 362.
You can display the used memory space (estimate)/the
number of saved files.
Osaifu-Keitai/ToruCa
Delete
Delete this
[List only]
YES
Delete selected
[List only]
Put a check mark for ToruCa files to be deleted
l(
)YES
Delete all
[List only]
You can delete all ToruCa files in the folder.
Enter your Terminal Security CodeYES
Delete
[Detailed display only]
YES
Information
The ToruCa file (details) that contains data whose output from the FOMA terminal is
prohibited is attached as a ToruCa file before receiving details.
You might not be able to attach the ToruCa file to i-mode mail depending on its file
size.
You cannot copy ToruCa files whose output from the FOMA terminal is prohibited.
302
Information
The ToruCa file (details) is copied as a ToruCa file before receiving details if it
contains the data file with the UIM security or whose output from the FOMA terminal is
prohibited.
When the number of files in the destination folder on the microSD card is full, a new
folder is automatically created and ToruCa files are saved to that folder.
When copying is completed, the message âStorage is changed to XXXXXXXXâ
(XXXXXXXX denotes a folder name) appears.
The name of copied ToruCa file is TORUCXXX (XXX denotes a numeral).
When no folder is set as a destination folder on the microSD card, a new folder is
created automatically and the file is saved to the folder. After saving, the newly
created folder is set as the destination folder.
You might not be able to execute âCopy to microSDâ for the ToruCa file depending on
its file size.
You might not be able to execute âCopy to phoneâ for the ToruCa file depending on its
file size.
Transparent GIF file (except animation GIF file) whose file extension is âifmâ is saved
as a frame or stamp.
Setting ToruCa
mOsaifu-KeitaiSettings
Do the following operations.
You can set whether to receive ToruCa file from a scanning
device using the IC card function or from another FOMA terminal
via iC transmission.
Accept or Reject
Auto reading
ToruCa
You can set whether to have the available ToruCa files
automatically recognized for when you place the FOMA terminal
over the scanning device.
Accept or Reject
Recv. ToruCa
display
You can set whether to display the detailed ToruCa File display
when you receive a ToruCa file while the Stand-by display is
shown.
ON or OFF
ToruCa from
dataBC
You can set whether to receive ToruCa files automatically from
data broadcasting while watching a 1Seg program.
Auto receive ON or Auto receive OFF
Check same
ToruCa
You can set whether to check the same ToruCa file is already
received before receiving a ToruCa file from a scanning device or
receiving a ToruCa file automatically from data broadcasting
while watching a 1Seg program.
ON or OFF
ON . . . . Checks and does not receive a new ToruCa file if the
same ToruCa file is already received.
OFF . . . Does not check. Receives even the same ToruCa file.
Osaifu-Keitai/ToruCa
Receive ToruCa
Information
If âAuto reading ToruCaâ is set to âRejectâ, you might not be able to use ToruCa files.
The ToruCa files stored in the âUsed ToruCaâ folder or expired ToruCa files are not
included in target files.
303
304
Map/GPS Function
Using GPS Function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Checking Your Location . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Using Map/GPS Compatible i-Îąppli . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Providing Location Information on Request
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Notifying Location Information. . . . . . . . .
Displaying History of Checked Location Information
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Setting GPS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
306
306
307
308
309
310
310
305
Using GPS Function
GPS is operated by the United States Department of Defense, so the GPS radio wave
conditions might be controlled (accuracy deterioration, radio wave supply suspension,
etc.) depending on the defense strategy of the United States Department of Defense.
Note that we do not take any responsibility for a loss such as pure economic loss
resulting from the facts that you have missed the chance to check the measurement
(communication) results, which have been caused by external factors such as
malfunctions, erroneous operations, troubles, or power failure (including battery
shortage) on the FOMA terminal.
You cannot use the FOMA terminal as a navigating system for aircraft, vehicles, and
people. Therefore, note that we are not held responsible for any damage resulting from
the use of the location information for navigation.
You cannot use GPS as a high-accuracy measuring device. Note that we do not take
any responsibility for the damage caused by an error in the location information.
You cannot use the GPS function when the FOMA terminal is out of the service area
(or overseas).
Checking Your Location
You can measure your current location and display it.
You can display a map and send your location information by mail as well.
mLifeKitMap/GPSPosition location
Blinks during measuring
Map/GPS Function
Information
You cannot use the GPS function in the following cases:
ăťDuring Self Mode
ăťDuring Omakase Lockâť
ăťDuring Lock Allâť
ăťWhile the UIM is not inserted
âťProvide Location is available.
As GPS uses radio waves transmitted from the satellites, note that you cannot or
might have difficulty to receive radio waves in the following conditions:
ăťIn a building or right under it
ăťIn the basement, tunnel, ground, water
ăťIn a bag or case
ăťIn densely crowded areas with buildings and houses
ăťIn densely crowded trees and right under them
ăťClose to high-tension wires
ăťIn a car or train
ăťIn bad weather such as heavy rain and snow
ăťWhen there are obstacles (persons and articles) around the FOMA terminal.
ăťWhen you cover the displays, keys, microphone, or speakers of the FOMA terminal
with your hand.
In these cases, an error in the obtained location information might become
300 meters or more.
Before you use Provide Location or Notify of Location, refer to the notice by GPS
service providers or on the DOCOMO website. Further, you might be charged a fee
for using these functions.
306
The current location is displayed by the latitude and longitude.
âŚMeasurement date âŚLatitude âŚLongitude
âŚGeographic datum
âŚAccuracy
â
â
â
: Almost accurate location information (Error is about less than
50 meters)
â
â
â: Relatively accurate location information (Error is less than about
300 meters)
â
ââ: Approximate location information (Error is about 300 meters or more)
The accuracy is an estimate. It might differ from actual one depending on the radio
wave conditions in the surrounding area.
Press l(
) to measure again in âQuality modeâ (see âPositioning modeâ
on page 311).
When â
â is displayed at bottom right of the display during measuring,
press i and select âOKâ to display the location using the information during
measuring.
You can measure your location also by pressing and holding 1 for at least one
second from the Stand-by display. After measuring, the âFunction Menu while
Current Location is Displayedâ on page 307 is performed following the setting of
âGPS button settingâ on page 311.
Function Menu while Current Location is Displayed
Read map
You can display a map by starting GPS compatible i-Îąppli
program set by âSelect mapâ.
Map/GPS Îąppli
You can use the location information on a GPS compatible i-Îąppli
program.
Select an i-Îąppli program.
Paste to mail
You can compose an i-mode mail message with the URL of the
location information pasted to the text.
YES
Go to step 2 on page 130.
The URL of the location information to be sent is displayed on
i-mode compatible phones only.
Add to phonebook You can store the location information in the Phonebook.
YES
Go to step 2 on page 82.
Attach to image
You can store the location information in the image.
Select a folderSelect an imagel(
YES or NO
YES . . . . Overwrites and saves.
NO . . . . . Saves as a separate file.
Start GPS Compatible i-Îąppli
You can select an i-Îąppli program from the GPS compatible i-Îąppli list to
start it.
mLifeKitMap/GPSMap/GPS Îąppli
Select an i-Îąppli program.
See page 271 for the Software list.
Information
When you use a GPS compatible i-Îąppli program, the location information is sent to
the information provider of the i-Îąppli program you use.
You need to set âLocation usageâ of âSoftware settingâ to âONâ when you use the GPS
function of a GPS compatible i-Îąppli program.
Using âĺ°ĺłă˘ă㪠(Map Application)â
âĺ°ĺłă˘ă㪠(Map Application)â is a useful i-Îąppli program that enables
you to show the map of your current or specified location, check area
information, or navigate yourself to the destination by using location
information. You can search for information of useful facilities in a time of
disaster. Further, using Chizu Talk function, you can exchange
messages with your friends on the map.
Using Map/GPS Compatible i-Îąppli
Map/GPS Function
Display a Map
You can start GPS compatible i-Îąppli program set by âSelect mapâ.
At purchase, âĺ°ĺłă˘ă㪠(Map Application)â is set and you can read a
map of current or specified location.
mLifeKitMap/GPSMap
When âSelect mapâ is not set, select a GPS compatible i-Îąppli program you use
for displaying a map.
Š 2009 ZENRIN DataCom CO., LTD.
307
â About Service Charge
The services provided by this application are classified as follows:
Charge-free functions
Map viewing and area information search are available. Gourmet-coupon search is
also available.
On the map, you can color the places for which you previously measured by using
GPS, by the unit of city, ward, town, village, or prefecture. This function shows the
visited places at a glance.
In addition to the ordinary map, you can change the mode to show the various types of
maps such as the 3D map, train-route accentuated map, and day/night mode map, etc.
Charged functions
You can use these functions charge free except traffic information for up to 60 days from
when you start Map Application for the first time. After this charge-free period, you need
to register yourself to My Menu at âăźăłăŞăł
ĺ°ĺłďźăă (ZENRIN
map+navi)â
(charged) provided by ZENRIN DataCom CO., LTD.
You can navigate yourself to the destination by the comprehensive search including
cars, trains, and on foot. Root search considering traffic snarls is also available.
You can show the train transfer information and timetables.
You can show the locations of your friends on the map and exchange messages with
them.
You can search for facilities which are useful in a time of disaster. You can also use the
disaster map application, the i-Îąppli program which does not require communications.
If you previously download the disaster map of your neighborhood, you will be helped
in case of emergency.
Map/GPS Function
Information
You are separately charged a packet communication fee. You are advised to
subscribe to Pake-hodai, Pake-hodai full or Pake-hodai double for using this software
program.
If you delete this software program, download it from âď˝ă¨ăŞă˘âĺ¨čžşć
ĺ ąâ (i-area
-Area Information-)â.
Note that we are not held responsible for the accuracy and promptness of the map
and route information.
While driving, ensure that a person other than the driver operates this software
program.
The displays are for reference, so the actual ones might differ.
308
Providing Location Information on Request
You can provide your location information on the request from others.
Depending on the service you use, you need to set GPS service settings
beforehand. (See page 311) Also, you need to set âLocation request set.â
to the setting to permit the location provision beforehand.
When a location provision request
arrivesYES or NO
YES . . . . Measures the current location and sends the
location information.
NO . . . . . Rejects to provide the location information.
If no keys are pressed for about 20 seconds, the former
display returns without providing your current location.
When a location provision request
arrivesOK
When you select âOKâ or about three seconds elapse,
the current location provision starts.
The information about where to provide might not be
displayed.
Press r to stop providing information. However, your
location information might be sent depending on the
timing.
Information
If no keys are pressed for about 15 seconds from the Position Location Result display
or the Failure display, the former display returns.
To use âimadoco searchâ, you need to trace from iMenu â âă厢ć§ăľăăźă (User
Support)â â âĺ税č¨ĺŽďźç˘şčŞăťĺ¤ć´ăťĺŠç¨ďź[Respective settings (Confirmation/
Change/Use)]â â âăăŽäťăľăźăăšč¨ĺŽăťç˘şčŞ (Other Service Settings/
Confirmation)â â to set âä˝ç˝Žć
ĺ ąĺŠç¨č¨ĺŽďźă¤ăăăłăľăźăč¨ĺŽďź[Location
Information Usage Setting (imadoco search Setting)]â.
When âLocation request set.â is set to other than âOFFâ, your location information might
be sent and known to the searchers, even if you do not operate the FOMA terminal.
Information
Notifying Location Information
You can notify a service provider of your current location.
mLifeKitMap/GPSNotify of location
Direct inputEnter a party to be notifiedYES
You can enter up to 12
digits by using numerals, #
and :.
If you have stored LCS
clients by âReg. LCS clientâ
beforehand, you can select
an LCS client from âView
service clientsâ.
You can press
l(
) to stop
measuring, but your current
location might be notified
depending on the timing.
OK
Information
Even when you send your location information, it might not be delivered to the service
provider depending on the radio wave conditions.
You are charged a fee for using the function to notify your current location.
To use Notify of Location, you might need to subscribe to a service provider that
supports Notify of Location. Further, you might be charged a fee for using the service.
You cannot enter any digits during Keypad Dial Lock.
Regardless of the mode of 2in1, your location information is notified by Number A.
309
Map/GPS Function
Even when you send your location information, it might not be delivered to the service
provider depending on the radio wave conditions.
In the following cases, the display of location provision request is not shown but the
request is rejected:
ăťWhen âLocation request set.â is set to âOFFâ.
ăťWhen you receive a location provision request from a party not stored in the
Phonebook while âLocation request set.â is set to âReject numbers unsetâ.
ăťWhen you receive a location provision request outside the validity period set by
âLocation request set.â.
When you set, by GPS service settings, the location provision request to be checked
every time, the location information is not provided on the location provision request
during Public mode (Drive mode).
When you set, by GPS service settings, the location provision request to be accepted,
the location information is provided with a display during Public mode (Drive mode)
but the positioning ring tone, vibrator, and illumination do not work.
When you are requested to provide your location information from the party using
âimadoco kantan searchâ, the confirmation display appears asking whether to send
the current location information each time you receive a request. Select âYESâ to
immediately send the rough position location result. After selecting âYESâ, the GPS
Measuring display appears and the precise position location result is notified after
GPS measuring. The rough position location result is notified even if you suspend the
location provision during GPS measuring. In this case, it is recorded in Location
History but the location information is not displayed.
Regardless of the mode of 2in1, the location information can be searched for Number
A only.
When the other party searches you by your Number B, your current location is not
provided and the searcher is notified that the search has failed.
A fee is not charged for using the Provide Location function.
For using the service, refer to the information on your service provider or the
DOCOMO website.
Add to phonebook
You can store the location information, phone number, or mail
address in the Phonebook.
Store loc. info., Store phone number, or Store mail
addressYES
Go to step 2 on page 82.
Attach to image
See page 307.
Compose message
You can compose an i-mode mail message to your location
provision requester.
Go to step 3 on page 130.
Dialing
See page 227.
Displaying History of Checked Location
Information
Up to 50 histories of Position Location, Notify of Location, and Provide
Location are stored.
mLifeKitMap/GPS
Location history
Select a location history.
â
: Position location
: Provide location
: Notify of location
â is displayed for the records of successful positioning.
Map/GPS Function
Information
When the location histories exceed 50, they are automatically overwritten from the
oldest one.
The location information and accuracy stored in Location History may differ from the
ones sent to the location provision requester or LCS client depending on the radio
wave conditions, and others.
When you cancel Position Location midway, fail to measure your location, or reject a
location provision request by the setting of âLocation request set.â, the history is not
recorded.
Even when the histories of Provide Location or Notify of Location are stored, they
might not have been delivered to your service providers.
You cannot use the measuring-failed histories of Provide Location or Notify of
Location for the operations other than âAdd to phonebook (except âStore loc. info.â)â,
âCompose messageâ, âDialingâ, and âDeleteâ.
When Provide Location was used, the name of the location provision requester is checked
against the Phonebook entries which appear in each mode of 2in1 and then shown.
If the phone number of the location provision requester is the one you added in your
âOwn numberâ, the name of the location provision requester is not displayed on
Location History.
Function Menu while Location History is Displayed
Read map
See page 307.
Map/GPS Îąppli
See page 307.
Paste to mail
See page 307.
310
Delete
Delete this
YES
Delete all
Enter your Terminal Security CodeYES
Setting GPS
mLifeKitMap/GPSGPS settings
Do the following operations.
Map setting
Select map
You can select a GPS compatible i-Îąppli program to use when
displaying a map from âMapâ or location information.
Select an i-Îąppli program.
See page 193 when you select âSearch by i-modeâ.
Map activate setting You can set whether to start the GPS compatible i-Îąppli
program after measuring your current location when
displaying a map.
Start after locating or Start without locating
GPS button setting
You can set a function which is performed after measuring
your location by pressing and holding 1 for at least one
second from the Stand-by display. You can select a function
from the âFunction Menu while Current Location is Displayedâ
on page 307.
Select a function.
If you set to âConfirm every sessionâ, you can select a
function each time you measure the location.
Posit. tone/illum.
See page 311.
Positioning mode
You can select a mode for measuring the current location from
either âStandard modeâ or âQuality modeâ.
When you select âQuality modeâ, it takes a longer time to
measure, but the measuring accuracy might be improved as a
result.
You can set a positioning mode for Position Location, Notify of
Location, and Provide Location respectively.
Select an operation to be set
Standard mode or Quality mode
See page 312.
Location request set.
See page 312.
Service settings
By accessing GPS service settings (a host set by âHost
selectionâ), you can configure the settings for the Provide
Location service such as the password and search permission
for location information.
See page 181 for operations while a site is displayed.
However, you cannot use the Bookmark or Screen Memo
function.
When you access from overseas, the error display appears
and you cannot use this function. However, you are charged
a packet communication fee.
Host selection
mLifeKitMap/GPSGPS settings
Posit. tone/illum.Select an operation to be set
Do the following operations.
Select posit. ring
tone
Select a folderSelect a ring tone.
While selecting a ring tone, you can check the selected tone.
Ring time setting
You can set a ring time for positioning ring tone.
Enter a ring time (seconds).
Enter two digits from â00â through â30â. For âLocation req./
Confirmâ, however, enter two digits from â00â through â20â.
If you set to 0 seconds, the tone does not sound.
Select vibrator
Select a vibration pattern.
If you select âMelody linkageâ, the FOMA terminal vibrates in
time with ring tone.
While selecting a vibration pattern, you can check the selected
vibration.
Select illumination Select an item.
While selecting an item, you can check the lighting/flickering of
the Call/Charging indicator.
Map/GPS Function
Reg. LCS client
Positioning Tone/Illumination
You can select a tone to sound for when you check your current location
or when you are requested to provide location information. You can set a
color of the Call/Charging indicator and the vibration pattern as well.
See page 314.
311
Information
Register LCS Client
If you have stored LCS clients, you can select an LCS client when you
notify of your current location. Further, you can automatically notify of
your current location when you make a call to the stored phone number.
You can store up to five LCS clients.
mLifeKitMap/GPSGPS settings
Reg. LCS clientHighlight and press
l(
) or Oo(
Do the following operations.
Even if âNotify when dialingâ is set to âONâ or to âConfirm every dialâ, you cannot notify
of your current location when you make a call without notifying of your caller ID.
Function Menu while LCS Client is Displayed
Delete
Delete this
YES
Delete all
Enter your Terminal Security CodeYES
Add to phonebook
You can store the service client name and phone number
stored in âReg. LCS clientâ into the Phonebook. (See
page 307)
Edit
Go to step 1 of âRegister LCS Clientâ on page 312.
You can edit also by pressing l(
).
Send Ir data
See page 360.
If you select a stored LCS client, you can confirm the stored contents.
Service client name Enter a service client name.
You can enter up to 16 full-pitch/32 half-pitch characters.
Service client ID
Map/GPS Function
Phone number
Enter a service client ID.
You can enter up to 12 digits by using numerals, # and :.
Enter the service client ID specified by your service provider.
Enter a phone number.
You can enter up to 26 digits.
Highlight the phone number field, press i(
), and
select âEnter from PBâ to call up a phone number from the
Phonebook and enter it.
If you enter a phone number by âEnter from PBâ with âService
client nameâ not entered, the name for the Phonebook entry is
entered.
Notify when dialing You can set whether to notify of your current location for when
you make a voice call or videophone call to the stored phone
number.
ON, OFF or Confirm every dial
To check each time you make a call, select âConfirm every dialâ.
Press l(
312
).
Send all Ir data
transmission
All
transmission
See page 361.
See page 362.
See page 363.
Location Request Set.
You can set how to operate when you receive a location provision
request. You can set a validity period when you set to permit the location
provision.
mLifeKitMap/GPSGPS settings
Location request set.
Enter your Terminal Security CodeSelect an item.
ON . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .Permits the location provision request by all searchers
and notifies the current location.
OFF . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .Rejects the location provision request.
Reject numbers unset . . .Permits the location provision request only by the
parties stored in the Phonebook. Requests from the
parties not stored in the Phonebook are automatically
rejected.
2
Select âYESâ to set a validity period
Do the following operations.
â Operations when the validity period for location provision is specified
Example: When the current date and time are 12:00/18/Nov and you set 14:00 as the
start time and 21:00 as the end time
Permit from
Enter the time for starting permission.
Permit to
Enter the time for ending permission.
1 time
Repeat
Select a repeat type.
When you select âSelect dayâ, put a check mark for days of the
week to be repeated, then press l(
).
Daily
Validity period
When you set to âRepeatâ, you can set the period to be valid.
ON or OFFEnter a validity date (from)
ON or OFFEnter a validity date (to).
Press l(
Repeat
Select day
).
Information
You can set âLocation request settingâ also by âInitial settingâ (see page 44).
When a location provision request is rejected by the setting of âLocation request set.â,
the history is not recorded.
You can specify from January 1, 2009 through December 31, 2037 for âPermission
scheduleâ.
When âReject numbers unsetâ is set, the location provision requests from all the
parties stored in the Phonebook are permitted regardless of the mode of 2in1.
Even if you set to âReject numbers unsetâ, you might receive a location provision
request from the party not stored in the Phonebook depending on the function in use.
Validity period
â
Period of location provision
14:00/18/Nov through 21:00/18/Nov
Start date: 20/Nov
End date: 30/Nov
Every day 14:00 through 21:00 from 20/Nov through
30/Nov
Start date: 10/Nov
End date: 30/Nov
Every day 14:00 through 21:00 from 18/Nov through
30/Nov
OFF
Every day 14:00 through 21:00 on and after 18/Nov
Start date: 20/Nov
End date: 30/Nov
14:00 through 21:00 of the specified days of the
week from 20/Nov through 30/Nov
Start date: 10/Nov
End date: 30/Nov
14:00 through 21:00 of the specified days of the
week from 18/Nov through 30/Nov
OFF
14:00 through 21:00 of the specified days of the
week on and after 18/Nov
Example: When the current date and time are 12:00/18/Nov and you set 10:00 as the
start time and 21:00 as the end time
Repeat
Validity period
1 time
Daily
Period of location provision
12:00/18/Nov through 21:00/18/Nov
Start date: 20/Nov
End date: 30/Nov
Every day 10:00 through 21:00 from 20/Nov through
30/Nov
Start date: 10/Nov
End date: 30/Nov
12:00/18/Nov through 21:00/18/Nov, every day
10:00 through 21:00 from 19/Nov through 30/Nov
OFF
12:00/18/Nov through 21:00/18/Nov, every day
10:00 through 21:00 on and after 19/Nov
Start date: 20/Nov
End date: 30/Nov
10:00 through 21:00 of the specified days of the
week from 20/Nov through 30/Nov
Start date: 10/Nov
End date: 30/Nov
If 18/Nov is the specified day;
12:00/18/Nov through 21:00/18/Nov, 10:00 through
21:00 of the specified days of the week from 19/Nov
through 30/Nov
OFF
If 18/Nov is the specified day;
12:00/18/Nov through 21:00/18/Nov, 10:00 through
21:00 of the specified days of the week on and after
19/Nov
313
Map/GPS Function
Select day
â
Example: When the current date and time are 12:00/18/Nov and you set 14:00 as the
start time and 10:00 as the end time
Repeat
Validity period
Select day
You can use this setting for changing the host for Service Settings.
Start date: 20/Nov
End date: 30/Nov
14:00 through 10:00 of the next day from 20/Nov
through 30/Nov
Start date: 10/Nov
End date: 30/Nov
14:00 through 10:00 of the next day from 18/Nov
through 30/Nov
OFF
14:00 through 10:00 of the next day on and after
18/Nov
Start date: 20/Nov
End date: 30/Nov
14:00 through 10:00 of the next days of the specified
days of the week from 20/Nov through 30/Nov
Start date: 10/Nov
End date: 30/Nov
14:00 through 10:00 of the next days of the specified
days of the week from 18/Nov through 30/Nov
OFF
14:00 through 10:00 of the next days of the specified
days of the week on and after 18/Nov
â
Example: When the current date and time are 12:00/18/Nov and you set 10:00 as the
start time and 10:00 as the end time
Repeat
Validity period
1 time
Map/GPS Function
Daily
Select day
314
âťNormally, you do not need to change this setting.
14:00/18/Nov through 10:00/19/Nov
1 time
Daily
Period of location provision
Host Selection
â
Period of location provision
12:00/18/Nov through 10:00/19/Nov
Start date: 20/Nov
End date: 30/Nov
10:00/20/Nov through 10:00/1/Dec
Start date: 10/Nov
End date: 30/Nov
12:00/18/Nov through 10:00/1/Dec
OFF
12:00/18/Nov through 10:00/19/Nov, every day
10:00 through 10:00 of the next day on and after
19/Nov
Start date: 20/Nov
End date: 30/Nov
10:00 through 10:00 of the next days of the specified
days of the week from 20/Nov through 30/Nov
Start date: 10/Nov
End date: 30/Nov
If 18/Nov is the specified day;
12:00/18/Nov through 10:00/19/Nov, 10:00 through
10:00 of the next days of the specified days of the
week from 19/Nov through 30/Nov
OFF
If 18/Nov is the specified day;
12:00/18/Nov through 10:00/19/Nov, 10:00 through
10:00 of the next day of the specified days of the
week on and after 19/Nov
mLifeKitMap/GPSGPS settingsHost selection
Highlight and press l(
).
If you select a stored host, the setting is changed to that host.
To delete a stored host, press i(
), select âDeleteâ and select âYESâ.
Do the following operations.
Host name
Enter a host name.
You can enter up to 9 full-pitch/18 half-pitch characters.
Host number
Enter a host number.
You can enter up to 99 half-pitch alphanumeric characters.
Host address
Enter a URL.
You can enter up to 100 half-pitch alphanumeric characters.
Press l(
).
Data Management
Data Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 316
Making Full Use of Still Images
Displaying Images . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 318
Editing Still Images. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 323
Creating Animations. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 325
Making Full Use of Moving Pictures
Playing i-motion/Movie. . . . 326
Using Playlist . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 331
Editing i-motion . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 332
Making Full Use of Video
Playing Video . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 334
Making Full Use of Chara-den
Chara-den . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 337
Displaying/Operating Chara-den Images
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 337
Recording Chara-den Images . . . . . . . . . 338
Making Full Use of Machi-chara
Displaying Machi-chara Images . . . . . . . . . . . . 339
352
352
353
353
353
354
Making Full Use of Various Data
Managing Folders . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
356
Making Full Use of Infrared Communication
Using Infrared Communication . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Sending/Receiving One or Multiple Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Sending/Receiving All Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Using Infrared Remote Control Function. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Communication Setting. . . . . . . . . . . . . .
358
360
361
362
362
Making Full Use of iC Communication Function
iC Communication Function . . . . . . . . . . . . 362
Sending/Receiving One Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 362
Sending/Receiving All Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 363
Making Full Use of Voice Recorder
Making Full Use of Melodies
Playing a Melody. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 340
Using Voice Recorder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 363
Making Full Use of PDF Viewer
Making Full Use of Kisekae Tool
Checking Kisekae Tool . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 343
Displaying PDF Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 364
Making Full Use of Document Viewer
Making Full Use of microSD Card
microSD Card . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Inserting/Removing microSD Card . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Displaying Data Items on microSD Card . . . . . . . .
Copying Still Images, Moving Pictures, etc. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Moving Copyrighted Files . . . . . . . . . . . .
Back up/Restore Data Files Collectively . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Managing Unsupported Files . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Formatting microSD Card . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Checking microSD Card . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Displaying Capacity of microSD Card . . . . . . .
Using a microSD Card with a Personal Computer . . . . . . . . . .
Folder Configuration on microSD Card . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
344
344
345
348
350
351
Displaying Word, Excel, and PowerPoint Files
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 368
Printing Still Images
Printing Saved Images . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
369
315
MUSIC
i-mode
Data Box
Data Box contains the items and folders as listed below. Data is saved to
respective folders according to the contents.
Data Management
My picture
i-mode
Search by i-mode
Camera
Deco-mail picture
Search by i-mode
Deco-mail ăć°ăŤĺ
Ľă (Favorite)âť1
pictograms içľľćĺ (ipictogram)âť1
čŁ
飞 (Decoration)âť1
ăăźăăťăăŠăăŠ
(Heart/Sparkling)âť1
夊ć°ăťĺŁçŻ
(Weather/Season)âť1
秝ĺăťçć´ť (Transfer/Life)âť1
éťčŠąăťăĄăźăŤ (Phone/Mail)âť1
éŁăšçŠ (Food)âť1
ăăŁăŠăŻăżăź
(Cartoon character)âť1
ćĺ (Character)âť1
Search by i-mode
Pre-installed
User folderâť2
Original animation
Frame/Stamp
Search by i-mode
microSD Picture
Downloaded still images, etc.
Connects to the data site.
Still images shot by the camera, shot Chara-den
images, etc.
Still images to be used for creating Deco-mail
Connects to the data site.
Pictograms to be used for creating Deco-mail
You can delete the pre-installed Deco-mail pictograms.
You can re-download them from the âP-SQUAREâ site
(see page 193). When you use a UIM other than the
one used for downloading, the UIM security function
(see page 37) is set for them.
Connects to the data site.
Pre-installed still images
Still images in the user folder
The function of displaying still images continuously
Still images to be used for frames and marker stamps
Connects to the data site.
Still images shot by the camera, and images in JPEG
format and GIF format that conform to the DCF
standard and were copied from the FOMA terminal
Image Box
Animation images in GIF format copied from the
FOMA terminal, and images in JPEG format that do
not conform to the DCF standard
Movable contents
Copyrighted still images moved from the FOMA terminal
Deco-mail pictograms Deco-mail pictograms copied from the FOMA terminal
316
Initial folder
Search by i-mode
User folderâť2
Search by i-mode
microSD
WMA
Music&Video Channel
Downloaded program
Saved program
imotion/Movie
i-mode
Search by i-mode
Camera
Pre-installed
Voice recorder
User folderâť2
Playlist
Position memory
Movie
microSD
Position memory
Played history
Search by i-mode
microSD SD video
Movable contents
Other contents
Melody
i-mode
Search by i-mode
Pre-installed
User folderâť2
Chaku-uta FullÂŽ music files obtained from sites
Connects to the data site.
Chaku-uta FullÂŽ music files in the user folder
Connects to the data site.
Copyrighted Chaku-uta FullÂŽ music files downloaded
or moved from the FOMA terminal
WMA files obtained from personal computer
Programs downloaded via Music&Video Channel
Programs saved to the FOMA terminal
i-motion files obtained from sites, etc.
Connects to the data site.
i-motion files recorded by the camera, shot Chara-den
movies, etc.
Pre-installed i-motion files
Voices recorded by the voice recorder
i-motion files in the user folder
Playback of playlist
Playback of marker position
Movie files downloaded, or saved by personal
computer
Playback of marker position
Playback histories of movie files
Connects to the data site.
Moving pictures shot by the camera or i-motion files
copied from the FOMA terminal
Copyrighted i-motion files moved from the FOMA
terminal
Voice-only i-motion filesâť3 recorded by using the
camera function, voice-only i-motion filesâť3 copied
from the FOMA terminal, or video-unplayable i-motion
filesâť3 copied from the FOMA terminal
Downloaded melodies, etc.
Connects to the data site.
Pre-installed melodies
Melodies in the user folder
Voice announce
Playlist
Search by i-mode
microSD Melody
Movable contents
My documents
i-mode
microSD My documents
Data files recorded by using âVoice announceâ
Playback of playlist
Connects to the data site.
Melodies copied from the FOMA terminal
Copyrighted melodies moved from the FOMA terminal
Pre-installed or downloaded PDF files
PDF files downloaded or copied from the FOMA
terminal
Copyrighted PDF files moved from the FOMA terminal
âť1 The folder names can be changed by âEdit folder nameâ. Deco-mail pictograms are
directly saved to these folders, and files other than Deco-mail pictograms cannot be
saved to them.
âť2 The folder names you have entered for âAdd folderâ are displayed.
âť3 Includes the music files in AAC format.
Picture
File Type
Icon
âť
Title name
Type
File format
Still image
JPEG
Still image with location information
JPEG
Still image/Animation image
GIF
Frame
GIF
Marker stamp
GIF
Flash movie
SWF
i-motion file
MP4 (AMR)
i-motion file
MP4 (AAC)
i-motion file
MP4 (AAC+[HE-AAC])
i-motion file
MP4 (Enhanced aacPlus)
i-motion file
ASF
Movie file
WMV, ASF
Movie file on the Internet
WVX, ASX
Movie file
WMA
Movie file on the Internet
WAX
Video
MPEG2-TS
Video already viewed
MPEG2-TS
Video not viewed yet
MPEG2-TS
Partially saved i-motion file
â
Melody
SMF
Melody
MFi
Complete PDF file
PDF
Partial PDF file
PDF
Data Management
Movable contents
Kisekae Tool
Pre-installed or downloaded Kisekae Tool files
Search by i-mode
Connects to the data site.
microSD
Kisekae Tool files downloaded, or moved from the
FOMA terminal
Machi-chara
Pre-installed or downloaded Machi-chara images
Search by i-mode
Connects to the data site.
microSD
Machi-chara images downloaded, or moved from the
FOMA terminal
Chara-den
Pre-installed or downloaded Chara-den images
1Seg
Image
Still images recorded by 1Seg
Video
Video recorded by 1Seg, and copyright-protected and
1Seg-compatible moving pictures created with other
AV devices
Position memory
Playback of marker position
Document viewer
Document files saved from mail (attached files)
SD other files
SD others
Incompatible files saved from mail (attached files), or
downloaded files in BMP or PNG format
â Icons on the File list
317
Data Management
Icon
Type
File format
PDF
Damaged PDF file
PDF
Attach to i-mode mail
Kisekae Tool file
â
Insert images into Deco-mail, or create Decome-Anime messages
Partially saved Kisekae Tool file
â
Set display
Machi-chara image
â
Partially saved Machi-chara image
â
Chara-den image
â
Word file
WORD
Excel file
EXCEL
PowerPoint file
POWERPOINT
Incompatible file
â
âťFor the video recorded by the device other than this FOMA terminal, the icon for
already viewed video is displayed.
For the file with the file restrictions, â
â is added to each icon.
Some files have restrictions on the number of playbacks, playable period, or playable
deadline. â â is added to the icon of the file with playback restrictions and â â is
added to the icon of the file with playback restrictions expired.
Acquired source
Icon
âť1
Description
Obtained from sites or i-mode mail attachment
Files shot by the FOMA terminal, or recorded by the voice recorder
Obtained from infrared communication or iC communication or microSD
card
Files of recorded Chara-den images
Files of recorded 1Seg programs
âť2
Movie file on the Internet played back from i-mode
âť2
Movie file on the Internet played back from Full Browser
âť2
Movie file saved to the microSD card
âť1 For the copyrighted file movable to the microSD card, â
â is displayed.
âť2 Displayed only for âPosition memoryâ or âPlayed historyâ in the âMovieâ folder.
318
Available operation
Incomplete PDF file
Icon
Description
Send Ir data, iC transmission
Copy to microSD card
Upload
Using location information
+m-4-6
Displaying Images
You can view the still images saved to the FOMA terminal and microSD
card.
mData boxMy pictureSelect a folder
Select a file.
Each time you press m
from the Folder list, you can
switch between the folders
in the FOMA terminal and
the microSD card.
See page 356 for the
Function menu of the
Folder list.
Folder list
Still Image list
The image on the right is displayed when you cannot display a
preview image.
When selecting folders or still images by another function, some
folders or still images may not be displayed depending on the
function. You may at times be able to confirm the still image by pressing
l(
) while you are selecting it.
See page 193 when you select âSearch by i-modeâ.
Display Images Recorded by 1Seg
mData box1SegImageSelect a file.
Function Menu of the Still Image List
Edit picture
See page 323.
Edit title
Enter a title.
For a file in the FOMA terminal, you can enter up to 9
full-pitch/18 half-pitch characters.
For a file on the microSD card, you can enter up to 18
full-pitch/36 half-pitch characters.
â Operations when playing back still images
See page 322 for when you operate from the Function menu.
Operation
Key operation
Vo
Display picture
You can display the image.
Display the previous fileâť1
Co
Set display
Zoom (Enlarge/Reduce)âť2
Oo(
You can paste the image to the Stand-by display and other
displays for displaying. See âPositioningâ for the position to
which you paste the still image.
Select the display you paste it to.
ââ
â is displayed for the pasted items but not for the
videophone related items other than âVideophone dialâ or
âV.phone incomingâ even if already pasted.
If you select the videophone related items other than
âVideophone dialâ or âV.phone incomingâ, an appropriate
message is displayed at the center of the still image.
Picture info
You can display the still image title, file name and others.
The item of âSet displayâ only is displayed for âPicture infoâ of
original animations.
)âť3
i(
) or l(
) to enlarge/reduce the
display during zoom
Oo(
) to return to the original size
Switch display directionsâť2âť4 m(
Each time of pressing rotates the still image
clockwise by 90 degrees.
âť1
âť2
âť3
âť4
Files are displayed in the order on the Still Image list.
You cannot operate depending on the image size or file format.
This operation pauses/plays back a file during playback of a Flash movie.
You can operate this only for still images in the âi-modeâ folder, âCameraâ folder,
user folders, folders on the microSD card, and âImageâ folder of â1Segâ.
â Specifications for playing back still image files
File format
JPEGâť1, GIF, Flash
Extension
jpg, gif, swf, ifm
Pixels
Files of 8M (2448 x 3264) or smallerâť2
File size
Still images of 3 Mbytes or less
Location info
âť1 The types of JPEG file you can play back are Baseline and Progressive of the Exif/
CIFF/JFIF format.
âť2 For the file in the Progressive format, you can display the file of VGA (480 x 640) or
smaller. For the file in the GIF format, you can display the file of 5M (1944 x 2592) or
smaller.
You cannot display some files even if their file formats are supported.
319
Data Management
Display the next fileâť1
Attach loc. info
Select an item.
By position loc.
. . . Measures the current location (see page 306) and stores
the location information. After checking the location
information, press Oo(
).
From loc. history
. . . Select a piece of location information from Location
History (see page 310) and store it.
From phonebook
. . . Select a Phonebook entry which contains the location
information for storing.
From own number
. . . Stores the location information from âOwn numberâ. Enter
your Terminal Security Code and press Oo(
).
Store in Center
See page 124.
Copy to phone
See page 349.
Move to microSD
See page 350.
Move to phone
See page 350.
Positioning
You can set the position for when you paste the still image to
the Stand-by display, etc.
See page 319 for âSet displayâ.
Select a position for displaying.
Edit file name
Enter a file name.
You can enter up to 36 half-pitch alphanumeric characters
and symbols (only â.â, â-â, â_â).
File restriction
If you set âFile restrictedâ for the file, the operation of attaching
to i-mode mail is disabled at the receiving end who receives
the image as the first distribution.
File unrestricted or File restricted
See page 225 for the file restrictions.
DPOF setting
See page 369.
Slideshow
All still images are consecutively displayed starting from the
still image selected in the folder. You can select the speed the
still image switches at.
Normal or Slow
Press Oo(
) to stop Slideshow. Press Oo(
again to resume Slideshow.
Copy
You can copy the still image, i-motion file, movie file, PDF file,
document file, or SD other file on the microSD card to another
folder on the microSD card.
Select a destination folder.
Data Management
YES
To delete the stored location information, select âDelete loc.
infoâ.
Delete loc. info
You can delete the location information stored in the image.
YES
Details
You can check the location information detail.
If you press i(
) while displaying the detail, the
Function menu for the location detail is displayed.
(See page 307)
Attach to mail
Go to step 2 on page 130.
You can compose an i-mode mail message also by pressing
l(
).
Create Deco-mail
You can create Deco-mail using data in the âDeco-mail
pictureâ folder or âDeco-mail pictogramsâ folder.
Go to step 2 on page 130.
See page 133 for Deco-mail.
Send Ir data
See page 360.
transmission
See page 362.
Add desktop icon
See page 30.
Copy to microSD
See page 348.
320
Move
You can move the still image, i-motion file, movie file, PDF file,
document file, Kisekae Tool file, Machi-chara image, or SD
other file to another folder.
Select a destination folder.
Press l(
) to display folders at the second-tier level
or lower, if they exist. Press r to return to the upper level.
YES
Delete all
You can delete all files in the folder.
Enter your Terminal Security CodeYES
Multiple-choice
You can select multiple files and operate them.
Put a check mark for the files to be operated
i(
)Select an item.
Picture/Title name/Listing
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .See page 321, page 340, page 343
and page 365.
Delete. . . . . . . . . . . . . .See âDelete thisâ on page 321.
DPOF setting . . . . . . .See page 369.
Copy . . . . . . . . . . . . . .See page 320.
Move . . . . . . . . . . . . . .See page 321.
Copy to microSD . . . .See page 348.
Copy to phone . . . . . .See page 349.
Send Ir data . . . . . . . .See page 360.
Select all . . . . . . . . . . .Selects all files.
Release all. . . . . . . . . .Releases all selected files.
Memory info
You can display the used memory space (estimate)/number of
stored items.
Sort
You can change displayed order.
Select an order.
You cannot sort the files on the microSD card.
Picture/Title name
You can switch the lists of still images.
You can switch the lists also by pressing c(
Information
You may not be able to edit the title depending on the file.
).
321
Data Management
Delete this
Information
You may not be able to execute Display Picture depending on the file.
Flash movies are played back at the volume set for âPhoneâ of âRing volumeâ.
When âPhoneâ of âRing volumeâ is set to âStepâ, they are played back at âLevel 2â.
Flash movies can be pasted only to âStand-by displayâ, âWake-up displayâ, âDialingâ,
âCallingâ, âVideophone dialâ, âV.phone incomingâ, âMail sendingâ, âMail receivingâ,
âCheckingâ, and âMail/msg. rcpt resultâ.
Animation GIF images cannot paste to the videophone related items other than
âVideophone dialâ or âV.phone incomingâ.
The displayed size might differ from the actual size depending on the image size or
the display pasted to.
You cannot execute âSet displayâ for some image files.
When the file is a JPEG image whose size is larger than 2 Mbytes (except
Progressive type files), it is converted to 2 Mbytes or less.
You may not be able to compose i-mode mail depending on the image.
See page 225 for attaching a file set with the file restriction to mail.
When an image size is larger than Sub-QCIF (128 x 96), the display for selecting how
to convert the image size appears. The converted still image is saved as a separate
new file.
Select âAttach directlyâ; then the image size does not change.
Select âSub-QCIF scale downâ; then the image size is scaled down to Sub-QCIF (128
x 96) or smaller with its proportional ratio retained.
Select âSub-QCIF trim awayâ; then the image size is scaled down or cut out to
Sub-QCIF (128 x 96) or smaller with its proportional ratio retained.
If the file size exceeds the maximum size to create a Deco-mail message, its size is
converted to the maximum size to create a Deco-mail message or less.
Even if you scale down or cut out the still image to Sub-QCIF (128 x 96), you can
again scale down or cut it out by pressing +l(
), or pressing +i(
) and
selecting âCancelâ. When you press +i(
) and select âSetâ, the Message
Composition display appears.
Depending on the image, you may not be able to create a Deco-mail message.
Data Management
Information
Send Ir data
You may not be able to edit the file name depending on the file.
You cannot use half-pitch space for the file name.
You may not be able to set the file restrictions depending on the file.
Flash movies are not displayed.
The time interval to show the images might differ depending on the image.
If a call comes in while copying/moving multiple files, copying/moving is canceled
even midway.
If a call comes in while deleting multiple files, deleting is canceled.
You can select up to 3,500 still images, i-motion files, movie files, melodies, PDF files,
Kisekae Tool files and Machi-chara images, and up to 100 videos, document files and
SD other files.
When you use âPictureâ to display still images, some images may appear different.
transmission
See page 360.
See page 362.
Display size
You can set whether to display the still image in original size
(normal size) or to fit to the display size.
Normal or Fit in display
Even if you set to âNormalâ, the still image in excess of the
display size is reduced to the display size. Also, when the
still image is QCIF (176 x 144) or smaller, it is doubled at
both lengthwise and sidewise to be displayed.
Add desktop icon
See page 30.
Copy to microSD
See page 348.
Store in Center
See page 124.
Copy to phone
See page 349.
Positioning
See page 320.
DPOF setting
See page 369.
Delete
See âDelete thisâ on page 321.
Retry
You can play back the animation or Flash movie from the
beginning.
Function Menu while Playing Back Still Image
Edit picture
See page 323.
Set display
See page 319.
Picture info
See page 319.
Location info
Attach loc. info
See page 320.
Delete loc. info
See page 320.
Details
See page 320.
Attach to mail
See page 320.
Create Deco-mail
See page 320.
322
Information
If animation GIF is displayed when âFit in displayâ is set, the moving of the animation
may become slower than when âNormalâ is set.
Information
When you select âEdit pictureâ while playing back a still image whose display direction
is switched, it returns to the original direction.
You cannot edit some still images, or you might have difficulty to produce editing
effect.
If you repeat editing image, the image quality may deteriorate or the file size may
become larger.
You may not be able to edit some still images after their sizes are changed.
The file name, title, storage location, and acquired source of the newly saved still
image are as follows:
ăťFile name: âYYYYMMDDhhmmnnnnâ
Title: âYYYY/MM/DD hh:mmâ
(Y: year, M: month, D: date, h: hour, m: minute, n: number)
ăť Storage location: A folder in which its source file is stored
ăťAcquired source: Same as its source file
Editing Still Images
Still Image list/Still image in play
i(
)Edit picture
When the still image is larger than Stand-by (480 x
854), it is reduced to Stand-by (480 x 854) or smaller.
Edit Picture display
)Edit the still image.
See page 323 to page 325 for how to operate.
Oo(
)YES or NO
YES . . . Overwrites the image to save.
NO . . . . Saves the image as a new still image.
When you edit a still image on the microSD card, you cannot overwrite it for
saving.
Press Oo(
) to save it to the folder in which its source file is stored. If files
on the microSD card are stored to the maximum and you cannot save a new file,
it is saved to the âi-modeâ folder.
Not to save the edited still image, press r or h; then select âYESâ.
See page 194 when images are stored to the maximum.
Function Menu of the Edit Picture Display
Marker stamp
You can add a marker stamp in the âFlame/Stampâ folder.
Select a marker stamp.
You can add a marker stamp whose size is smaller than the
image you are editing.
You can rotate the marker stamp by pressing i(
) and
selecting â90° to right/90° to left/180°â. Select âScale up/Scale
downâ to enlarge or shrink the marker stamp.
You can reselect a marker stamp by pressing l(
).
Use Mo to position the marker stamp and press
Oo(
).
You can add a marker stamp by pressing l(
).
Oo(
Information
You can execute âEdit pictureâ only for the âFile unrestrictedâ JPEG files of still images
shot by the cameras, obtained by data communication, downloaded from sites, or
retrieved from i-mode mail.
323
Data Management
i(
Frame
Data Management
Character stamp
Select a frameOo(
You can add the frame whose size is the same as the size of
the image you are editing.
You can display the previous or next frame by pressing No.
Press and hold No for at least one second to display
sequentially.
You can rotate the frame by pressing i(
) and
selecting â180° rotationâ.
You can reselect a frame by pressing l(
).
Trim away
You can add text.
Enter characters.
You can enter up to 15 full-pitch/30 half-pitch characters.
However, the number of characters you can enter decreases
depending on the size of the still image.
Press i(
) and select âFont colorâ to select a color;
then, you can change the color of characters. You can switch
between â16 Colorâ and â256 Colorâ by pressing c(
).
Select âFontâ to change the character fonts.
Select âFont sizeâ to enlarge or shrink characters.
Select âCharacter inputâ to edit entered characters.
Use Mo to position the charactersand press Oo(
Oo(
You can reselect a position by pressing l(
).
You can convert the image size to Stand-by (480 x 854).
YESOo(
Change size
Select an image size to change to.
If you select the size different in proportional ratio from the
source still image, the still image is enlarged or shrunk so that it
does not exceed the selected size with its proportional ratio
retained.
Oo(
You can reselect a size by pressing l(
324
).
Use Mo to select a part to be trimmed and press
Oo(
).
You can reselect a size to trim by pressing l(
).
Oo(
You can reselect a part to be trimmed by pressing
l(
).
Retouch
Fit in screen
You can trim the still image to a certain size.
Select an image size to trim to.
You cannot select a trimming frame larger than the still image
you are editing.
When the still image you are editing is larger than Stand-by (480
x 854), the still image and the trimming frame are reduced to be
displayed.
You can set texture and color tone of the still image.
Select an item.
Sharp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Stresses the outline.
Blur . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Softens the outline.
Sepia. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Makes the color tone sepia.
Emboss . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Makes the still image rugged.
Negative . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Reverses the color tone.
Horizontal flip . . . . . . . . . Flips the image horizontally.
Super clear shadow . . . . Makes the dark still image clear.
Memory color . . . . . . . . . Corrects the color and contrast.
Oo(
You can reselect an effect by pressing l(
).
Rotate
90° to right, 90° to left or 180°Oo(
You can reselect the rotation angle by pressing l(
Brightness
You can adjust the brightness to -3 (dark) through +3 (bright).
Select a brightness level.
Attach to mail
See page 320.
Save
See page 323.
).
Information
You cannot enlarge a marker stamp to the size larger than the still image you are
editing.
You cannot edit the still image smaller than 24 x 24 dots.
You cannot set some font colors depending on the image to be edited. In that case,
select another color.
You cannot edit the still image of Chat Picture (80 x 80) or smaller.
Set display
See page 319.
Picture info
See page 319.
Release animation YES
Function Menu while Playing Back Original Animation
Set display
See page 319.
Display size
See page 322.
Retry
You can play back the original animation again.
Information
If you delete a still image stored in an original animation, the original animation which
contains the still image is released.
Creating Animations
Data Management
You can select up to 20 JPEG files (20 frames) of Stand-by (480 x 854) or
smaller from the âi-modeâ folder, âCameraâ folder and user folders, and
play them back as animations. You can store 20 original animations.
mData boxMy picture
Original animation
To change, select an original animation you have set.
Original Animation list
Select a frame position from <1st> to <20th>
Select a folderSelect a still image.
To release the stored still image, select âRelease thisâ.
Repeat step 2l(
Function Menu of the Original Animation List
Edit title
Enter a title.
You can enter up to 9 full-pitch/18 half-pitch characters.
Orig. animation
Go to step 2 on page 325.
Display picture
You can play back the original animation.
325
The following images are displayed when you cannot display a preview image.
Playing i-motion/Movie
You can play back the i-motion files stored in the FOMA terminal or
microSD card, or the moving pictures published on the Internet for
personal computers (movie files).
You can play back the sound of i-motion/movie files in stereo sound by connecting to
the Stereo Earphone Set (option). Also, you can play back programs wirelessly by
using a commercial Bluetooth device. (See page 400)
Data Management
mData boximotion/MovieSelect a folder
Select a file.
Each time you press m
from the Folder list, you can
switch between the folders
in the FOMA terminal and
the microSD card.
See page 356 for the
Function menu of the
Folder list.
When you select a folder or
i-motion file from another
function, some folders or
i-motion files may not be
displayed depending on the
Folder list
i-motion list
function. You may be able
to confirm the i-motion file by pressing l(
) while selecting an i-motion
file.
Depending on the i-motion file, you can play back by selecting a chapter set for
the i-motion file. (See page 330)
See page 193 when you select âSearch by i-modeâ.
When you press h during playback, pause, or halt,
movie player ends. It ends even during playback with
obtaining.
Movie list
Unplayable
image
Playback restrictions have
expired, and the like.âť1
No preview
images
âť1 For the Movie list, the âNGâ image is displayed.
âť2 For the Movie list, the preview image is displayed.
â Operations when playing back i-motion/movie file
See page 330 for when you operate from the Function menu.
Operation
Key operation
Quick View
[i-motion only]
l(
) (See page 330)
Fast forward
[Movie only]
l(
Mute/Release mute
Pause
Oo(
l(
) to play back
Oo(
) to play back
) during pause
Play back frame by frame l(
[i-motion only]
Each time of pressing proceeds frame by frame.
Sound volume
adjustment
Bo or >
Display next file or
chapterâť1
Vo
Display previous file or o
chapterâť1
When playback time is over three seconds, you go back to
the beginning of the file. (You go back to the top of the
chapter for the file with chapters.)
Search (fast forward)
[i-motion only]
Press and hold Vo.
Search (fast rewind)
[i-motion only]
Press and hold Co.
Select position to playâť2 Press and hold No.
[Movie only]
326
Incomplete
downloadâť2
Operation
Key operation
Change vertical disp./
horizontal disp./
full disp.âť3âť4
c(
Each time of pressing switches display formats.
Remaster
Each time of pressing switches between âONâ and âOFFâ.
Listening
Each time of pressing switches in order of âOFFâ
â âSurroundâ â âNatur1â â âNatur2â.
Equalizer
Each time of pressing switches in order of âNormalâ
â âH.BASS1â â âH.BASS2â â âTrainâ.
You can perform the following operations during playback or pause of a
movie file by using the switch of an earphone/microphone (option).
Operation
Pause
Play back next file
Play back previous file
File format
MP4, ASF
Coding system
MP4 file
Video: MPEG4, H.263, H.264
Audio: AMR, AAC, AAC+ (HE-AAC), Enhanced aacPlus
ASF file
Video: MPEG4
Audio: G.726
Pixels
MPEG4: Files of VGA (640 x 480) or smaller
H.263: Files of only Sub-QCIF (128 x 96) and QCIF (176 x 144)
H.264: Files of QVGA (320 x 240) or smaller
Extension
sdv, 3gp, mp4, asf
Even when the file format is supported, you might not be able to play back some files.
â Specification for movie file playback
File format
WMV, WMA, WVX, WAX, ASF, ASX
Extension
wmv, wma, wvx, wax, asf, asx
Codec
Video
Bit rate
WindowsÂŽ Media Video 8 through 9âť
Audio
WindowsÂŽ Media Audio 2 through 9
Video
WMV 8
WMV 9
Voice
Video size
Frame rate
Data Management
âť1 i-motion files having no chapters or movie files are switched in the order on the
i-motion list/the Movie list. This operation is available when you play back from the
list. However, movie files in WVX, ASX, and WAX formats are skipped. i-motion files
having chapters are switched in the order that the chapters are stored.
âť2 You cannot operate this during fast-rewinding.
âť3 For movie files, the horizontal playback is valid during playback only. When you
close the playback display, the vertical display returns. You cannot operate this for
movie files with incompatible video data or voice-only movie files.
âť4 Movie files cannot be played back on full display.
You cannot do some operations depending on the state.
If you play back a movie file on the horizontal display from the pause state, the display
might become dark, however, the video appears soon after you resume the playback.
â Specifications for i-motion file playback
768 kbps
2 Mbps
384 kbps
WMV 8
Files of CIF (352 x 288) or smaller
WMV 9
Files of Wide VGA (800 x 480) or smaller
30 fps
Switch operation
Press once.
To play back, press again.
Press twice in succession.
Press three times in succession.
When playback time is over three seconds, you go
back to the beginning of the file.
âťThe complex profile of Windows Media Video 9 is not supported.
You might be able to play back the files that exceed the bit rates described above.
Even when the file format is supported, you might not be able to obtain files, play back
during obtaining, or play back after obtaining depending on the file.
If either video or audio of a file format is not supported, the file might be played back
with supported one only.
327
When you select âPosition memoryâ of âimotionâ or
âMovieâ from the folder list
Data Management
The display for selecting a position memory appears. For i-motion files, you can select
âMarker to resumeâ or âPosition memory 1/2â. For movie files, you can select âMarker to
resumeâ or âPosition memory 1 through 9â. When you select âMarker to resumeâ or
âPosition memoryâ, the i-motion/movie file is played back from the stored position.
Marker to resume
This is stored automatically when a call comes in, an alarm
operates, the battery goes flat during playback of an i-motion/
movie file, or when you terminate the movie player during
playback.
Position memory
You can store in any optional position in i-motion/movie files. For
an i-motion file, you can create up to two position memories. For
a movie file, you can create up to nine position memories. (See
page 329 and page 330)
To display the information of âPosition memoryâ, press i(
memory infoâ.
To delete âPosition memoryâ of an i-motion file, press i(
To delete âPosition memoryâ of a movie file, press i(
Information
Search (fast forward or fast rewind) and frame-by-frame playback are silent. Search
(fast forward or fast rewind) is available during pause or playback (including slow and
quick view).
If you receive mail or a Message R/F when playing back an i-motion file, the video or
sound might be interrupted.
Files with the extension of wvx, wax, asx are the movie files whose URLs are
specified on the Internet. When you select those files saved on the microSD card,
streaming or downloading playback starts from the specified URL.
Function Menu of the i-motion List/Movie List/Played
History List
Edit imotion
See page 332.
Edit title
You can edit the title of i-motion file. (See page 319)
) and select âPosit.
Set imotion
) and select âDeleteâ.
Ring tone
You can set an i-motion file for a ring tone.
Select an incoming type.
The set item is indicated by ââ
â.
Stand-by display
You can set an i-motion file for the Stand-by display.
YES
Wake-up display
You can set an i-motion file for the Wake-up display.
YES
) and select
âMultiple-choiceâ, âDelete thisâ, or âDelete allâ. You cannot delete âMarker to resumeâ.
You cannot play back an i-motion/movie file with a position memory, when you delete
it, edit its file name, or move it to another folder.
Even when you play back a movie file from a position memory, it may be played back
from the beginning, depending on the movie file.
When you select âPlayed historyâ from the folder list
When you play back a movie file, the URL or storage location
of the file is stored as a history. Up to 30 histories are stored,
and when those are exceeded, the oldest history is overwritten.
Select a played history to play back the movie file according to
the history information.
You cannot play back a movie file stored in Played History,
Played History list
when you delete it or move it to another folder.
When you play back an obtained but unsaved movie file from the data acquisition
completion display, it is not stored in Played History.
328
imotion info
You can display the title, file name and others of the i-motion
file.
Attach to mail
You can compose an i-motion mail message with the file
attached.
Go to step 2 on page 130.
You can compose it also by pressing l(
).
Send Ir data
transmission
See page 360.
See page 362.
Copy to microSD
See page 348.
Copy to phone
See page 349.
Move to microSD
See page 350.
Move to phone
See page 350.
Contents info
You can display the title, file name and others of the movie file.
Move
See page 321.
You can display the used memory space (estimate)/number of
stored items.
Sort
See page 321.
Listing
You can change the displayed contents on the i-motion list/
Movie list. You can select whether to display the titles or file
names on the microSD Card list.
Select a display format.
Title . . . . . . . . . . . . .Titles or file names are listed.
Title + Image . . . . . .Titles or file names, and an image are
displayed at a time. The displayed image
is the first frame of i-motion/movie file.
Title/File name . . . .You can select whether to display titles
or file names.
In the case of the microSD Card list, âTitleâ is displayed as
âNameâ, and âTitle + Imageâ is displayed as âName +
Imageâ.
You can switch the displayed contents also by pressing
c(
).
Edit title
Edit title
You can edit the title of movie file. (See page 319)
Reset title
You can reset the title of the movie file to the default.
YES
Copy
See page 320.
Add desktop icon
See page 30.
Edit file name
See page 320.
File restriction
See page 320.
Reset title
You can reset the title of the i-motion file to the default.
YES
History info
You can display information of the played history.
Position memory
You can store the URL information of a movie file stored in
Played History to a position memory. When you play back the
file from the position memory, it is played back from the
beginning.
Select a position memory to be stored.
You cannot select âMarker to resumeâ.
Description
You can display the lyric or description of the movie file.
The words view or Description view
Up to 1,024 full-pitch/2,048 half-pitch characters can be
displayed in each.
Delete this
See page 321.
Delete all
See page 321.
Multiple-choice
See page 321.
Information
When you set an i-motion file other than VGA (640 x 480) for the Stand-by display, it is
enlarged or reduced to VGA (640 x 480).
You cannot set the i-motion file whose acquired source is â
â as a ring tone or
receiving display.
See âimotion infoâ to check whether the i-motion file can be set for a ring tone or
receiving display.
When the file size is larger than 2 Mbytes, the confirmation display appears asking
whether to cut it out to the mail size. Select âYESâ to cut out the i-motion file from the
beginning to the about 2-Mbyte point.
You may not be able to compose i-mode mail depending on the i-motion file.
Depending on the i-motion file, its file size may become larger or smaller.
You cannot attach an i-motion file in excess of 2 Mbytes to mail from the Edit
imotion display. See âTrim for mailâ for how to cut out the i-motion file for attaching
to i-motion mail.
329
Data Management
Memory info
Data Management
Function Menu during Pause/at the End of Playback
Normal play
The i-motion file is played back at the normal speed.
Chapter list
You can display the list of chapters stored in the i-motion file
and select a chapter to be played back.
Select a chapter to be played back.
Slow
The i-motion file is played back mute at half the normal speed.
To cancel Slow playback, press l(
) or perform
âNormal playâ.
Quick View (1.25x)
The i-motion file is played back at the speed 1.25 times the
normal speed.
Press l(
) to play back the i-motion file at twice the
normal speed. Press l(
) to play back at the
normal speed.
Quick View (2x)
The i-motion file is played back at twice the normal speed.
To cancel Quick View, press l(
) or perform
âNormal playâ.
Fast
The movie file is played back fast.
To cancel it, press l(
).
Rewind
The movie file is played back fast in the opposite direction.
To cancel it, press l(
).
Stop
You can end playback.
Position to play
You can set the start point for playing back the i-motion/movie
file.
Use No to move the cursor position of the time bar
Oo(
).
To cancel, press r.
Sound effect
Remaster
330
Listening
You can set the effect of the sound from an earphone or
Bluetooth device.
Select an item.
Surround . . . Makes the sound natural and stereophonic.
Natur 1/2 . . . . Complements the cooped-up feeling specific
to earphones and plays back natural sound.
Select 1 or 2 according to your taste.
OFF . . . . . . . . Sets Listening to âOFFâ.
Equalizer
You can change the quality of the sound from an earphone or
Bluetooth device.
Select an item.
Normal . . . . . Reproduces normal sound quality.
H.BASS1 . . . . Enhances bass sound.
H.BASS2 . . . . Enhances bass sound more deeply than
H.BASS1.
Train . . . . . . . Minimizes abnormal sound that causes sound
leakage.
Contents info
See page 329.
Position memory
You can store a position memory in the i-motion/movie file.
Store it at the desired position in pause state.
Select a position memory to be stored.
You cannot select âMarker to resumeâ.
Edit imotion
See page 332.
Attach to mail
See page 328.
You can compose an i-mode mail message also by pressing
l(
) from the playback end display.
Set imotion
See page 328.
imotion info
See page 328.
Send Ir data
You can bring the sound from an earphone or Bluetooth
device to the original sound by complementing high-pitch
range lost at data compression.
ON or OFF
transmission
See page 360.
See page 362.
Copy to phone
See page 349.
Add desktop icon
See page 30.
Description
See page 329.
Copy URL
Display size
Change to full
You can copy the URL of a movie file published on the
Internet during playback.
You can copy up to 512 half-pitch characters for the URL.
You can set whether to display an i-motion/movie file in the
original size (Actual size) or to fit to the display size.
Actual size or Fit in display
Even if you set to âActual sizeâ, the i-motion/movie file in
excess of the display size is reduced to the display size.
Also, when the i-motion/movie file is QCIF (176 x 144) or
smaller, it is doubled at both lengthwise and sidewise to be
displayed.
You can switch display formats of i-motion file. Each time of
selecting the item switches displays in order of playback on
the vertical display â playback on the horizontal display fitted
to the display size â playback on the enlarged full display.
When restrictions on chapter forward/rewind are applied, you cannot select chapters
after/before the one you are currently playing back.
You cannot slow-play the following i-motion files:
ăťA streaming type of i-motion file
ăťAn i-motion file being played back while obtaining data
ăťAn i-motion file played back from the Stand-by display
You cannot execute Quick View for some i-motion files.
It may be hard to hear sound during Quick View.
Depending on the i-motion/movie file, you might not be able to select the position to
play.
Even if an earphone or Bluetooth device is not connected, the respective setting
contents are shown on the display.
When audio format of the i-motion file is AMR or G.726, sound effect might be
unavailable.
Using Playlist
You can store i-motion files in a playlist, and continuously play them
back in the order you like. You can create up to 5 playlists, and can store
up to 30 files per playlist.
Store Playlist
mData boximotion/movie
PlaylistSelect Playlist 1 through 5.
Playlist list
Select <1st> through <30th>Select a folder
Select an i-motion file.
Repeat step 2l(
To release a stored i-motion file, press i(
) and select âDEL one from
listâ. Select âDEL all from listâ, then you can release all the stored i-motion files.
To change the order of stored i-motion files, press i(
), select âOrder to
playâ, and select an i-motion file whose position to be changed. Then, select the
destination position to change the order.
Information
You cannot store partially saved i-motion files in the playlist.
331
Data Management
Information
Information
Depending on the i-motion/movie file, you might not be able to store the position
memory.
Depending on the movie file, the top position might be stored as the playback start
position regardless of the position where you pause.
The i-motion file of QCIF (176 x 144) or smaller is not played back in full display.
Play Back Playlist
Playlist listHighlight a playlist and press l(
).
Function Menu of the Playlist List
i(
)Edit the i-motion file.
See page 333 for the operation.
Press Oo(
).
Not to save the edited i-motion file, press r or h; then select âYESâ.
YES
See page 194 when i-motion files are stored to the maximum.
Play
See page 332.
Edit playlist
You can edit the playlist.
Go to step 2 on page 331.
â Operations while an i-motion file is edited or a demo is played back
Release playlist
You can release all i-motion files stored in the playlist.
YES
Pause
You can edit the name of the playlist.
Edit a playlist name.
You can enter up to 10 full-pitch/20 half-pitch characters.
Oo(
Press Oo(
Fast forward
Press and hold Vo.
Edit playlist name
Data Management
Operation
Key operation
Fast rewind
Press and hold Co.
Forward frame by frame
Vo during pause
Editing i-motion
Rewind frame by frame
Co during pause
Sound volume adjustment Bo or >
You can edit i-motion files. The edited i-motion files are saved to the
folder containing the source i-motion files.
You cannot do some operations depending on the state.
Information
i-motion list/During pause/At the end of
playbacki(
Edit imotion
Use Bo or > to adjust the sound volume.
Edit imotion display
332
) to play back.
You cannot edit the following i-motion files:
ăťThe files with âFile restrictionâ and âReplay restrictionâ obtained from sites or i-mode
mail
ăťThe files other than VGA (640 x 480), HVGA Wide (640 x 352), QVGA (320 x 240),
QCIF (176 x 144) and Sub-QCIF (128 x 96)
ăťThe files saved to the microSD card
You might not be able to edit some i-motion files.
The image quality may deteriorate or the file size may become larger or smaller by
executing âEdit imotionâ.
When a call comes in or the battery goes flat, the confirmation display appears asking
whether to save the fixed edited contents. When you close the FOMA terminal while
you are editing, the edited contents are discarded.
Function Menu of the Edit imotion Display
Trim imotion
You can cut out a certain range from an i-motion file.
Use Vo to display a start framel(
The start frame is set and the i-motion file is played back.
Press Oo(
) at the position you want to cut out.
Playing back the i-motion file pauses.
Trim for picture
See page 320.
Information
If you execute âTrim imotionâ, the file size may become larger.
Function Menu while i-motion is Edited
Use Vo to display an end framel(
The cut out range is played back.
When the file size reaches about 10 Mbytes, the end frame is
automatically set.
Normal play
You can play back at the normal speed.
Slow
You can play back mute at half the normal speed.
Oo(
Press l(
i-motion file.
Quick View (2x)
You can play back at twice the normal speed.
Starting point
You can set the start frame for âTrim imotionâ and âTrim for
mailâ.
Ending point
You can set the end frame for âTrim imotionâ.
Determine
You can set the frame for âTrim for pictureâ.
Stop
You can stop playing back.
) to play back a demo to check the edited
You can cut out the still image and save it.
Use Vo to display a framel(
)YES
Select a folder.
See page 194 when images are stored to the maximum.
Quick View (1.25x) You can play back at the speed 1.25 times the normal speed.
Data Management
Trim for mail
File restriction
You can cut out the i-motion file to the size attachable to i-mode
mail.
Mail size (S) or Mail size
Mail size (S) . . . Cut out to the size of about 500 Kbytes or less.
Mail size . . . . . . Cut out to the size of about 2,048 Kbytes or
less.
Use Vo to display a start framel(
The i-motion file is played back.
When the file size reaches about 500 Kbytes, about 2,048
Kbytes, or at the end of playback, the playback stops
automatically.
Oo(
Press l(
) to play back a demo and you can check the
edited i-motion file.
Attach to mail
See page 328.
333
Operation
Pauseâť1
Playing Video
Oo(
You can play back the video saved to the microSD card.
You can play back the sound of video files in stereo sound by connecting to the Stereo
Earphone Set (option). Also, you can play back the sound wirelessly from a
commercial Bluetooth device. (See page 400)
Data Management
mData box1SegVideoSelect a file.
Vo
Key operation
Each time pressing switches in order of â1.25xâ â â2xâ
â âSummary Viewâ â âNormal playâ.
Mute/Release mute
) to play back
Skip (fast forward)âť1âť2
Vo(for at least one second) or s during playback or pause
Skip (rewind)âť1âť3
Co(for at least one second) or a during playback or pause
Program titleâť4
It is displayed with a time bar and others.
It is displayed as well when you operate keys.
Switch display
d while displaying program title
Each time of pressing from the horizontal display
switches ON/OFF of âIconâ and âCaptionâ.
Each time of pressing from the horizontal display
switches the positions of the time bar as well regardless
of whether the caption is displayed or not.
Video list
Quick Viewâť1
) to play back
Co
Oo(
â Operations when playing video
See page 336 for when you operate from the Function menu.
) to play back
l(
) during pause
Each time of pressing proceeds frame by frame.
Oo(
No preview image
Sound volume adjustment Boâť1 or >\
Rewindâť1
Folder list
The images on the right are displayed
when you cannot display a preview image:
When you play back, the program title and
time bar (estimate) appear.
Unplayable
image
Operation
Play back frame by
frameâť1
Fast forwardâť1
When the position to play is
recorded to the video, the
playback starts from the
position to play. Press
l(
) to play back
from the beginning.
When you select a file
which contains divided
video files from the Video
list, select a video file to
play back from the list of
divided video files.
334
Key operation
Oo(
Switch display directions/ c
Full display
In Video Mode, each time of pressing switches the
display directions.
In Data Broadcasting Mode, each time of pressing
switches between standard display and full display.
Switch TV/data BC
âť1
âť2
âť3
âť4
m(
)âť5
Each time of pressing switches between Video Mode
and Data Broadcasting Mode.
You cannot operate in Data Broadcasting Mode.
You cannot operate for a file whose playback time is shorter than 30 seconds.
You cannot operate for a file whose playback time is shorter than 10 seconds.
When you operate immediately after âSkipâ, âFast forwardâ, âRewindâ, or âPosition to
playâ, the program title stored in âVideo infoâ might appear.
âť5 This operation is to display the program title while the horizontal display is shown.
When you select âPosition memoryâ from the Folder list for
videos
The display for selecting Position Memory appears. When you select âMarker to resumeâ
or âPosition memory 1/2â, the video is played back from the stored position.
Marker to resume
This is stored automatically when a call comes in, an alarm
operates, or the battery goes flat during playback of a video.
Position memory
You can store in any optional position in a video, and create up to
two position memories. (See page 336)
To delete âPosition memoryâ, press i(
) and select âDeleteâ. You cannot
delete the âMarker to resumeâ.
When the video with a position memory has been deleted, you cannot play it back.
Information
Edit title
Enter a title.
You can enter up to 18 full-pitch/36 half-pitch characters.
Video info
You can display the channel name, program name, etc. of the
video.
You can display them also by pressing c(
).
Add desktop icon
See page 30.
Reset title
You can reset the title to the default.
YES
Delete
Delete this
YES
Delete selected
You can select multiple videos and delete them.
Put a check mark for videos to be deleted
l(
)YES
Delete all
Enter your Terminal Security CodeYES
Memory info
You can display the used memory space (estimate).
Listing
You can change the displayed contents for Video list.
Select a display format.
Title . . . . . . . . . . . . The title names are displayed.
Title + image . . . . . The title name and image are displayed at
a time. The displayed image is the first
frame of video.
Information
If a call comes in while deleting multiple videos, deleting is canceled.
The video whose recording time is long might take a long time to be deleted. Make
sure that the remaining battery is full enough.
You might not be able to delete the video containing data that does not support the
FOMA terminal.
The video that was not recorded correctly owing to the bad radio wave conditions
might not be played back.
335
Data Management
No sound is output during frame-by-frame playback or during skipping. Further,
captions are not displayed.
Even if you set âSound settingâ to âONâ, effect tones do not sound during pause,
frame-by-frame playback, slow playback, or quick view playback.
When you select âYES (default)â from the confirmation display for data broadcasting
while watching a 1Seg program or playing back video, the information on data
broadcasting might be automatically updated, and you might be charged a packet
communication fee. (See page 247)
You might not be able to operate links by selecting them on data broadcasting during
pause or at the end of playback.
You cannot display data broadcasting on the horizontal display.
The part of video that was not correctly recorded owing to the bad radio wave
conditions is not displayed and skipped to the position where it can be displayed
correctly. In that case, the video might not be played back for a few seconds, or might
be distorted. Further, the time bar might not be displayed correctly.
If you try to play back a video with a low battery, the battery alert tone sounds, and the
confirmation display appears asking whether to play it back. When the battery
becomes low during playback, the playback pauses, the battery alert tone sounds,
and the confirmation display appears asking whether to end the playback. The battery
alert tone sounds regardless of the setting of âKeypad soundâ.
If you edit (divide) the video using a mobile phone or personal computer that supports
the edit function, you might not be able to correctly play it back on the FOMA terminal.
The protection applied by other devices is not supported.
Function Menu of the Video List
Switch display
Data Management
Function Menu during Pause/at the End of Playback
Normal play
The video is played at the normal speed.
Slow
The video is played back mute at half the normal speed.
To cancel Slow play, perform âNormal playâ.
Quick View
The video is played back quickly.
Select an item.
1.25x . . . . . . . . . . . . The video is played back at the
speed 1.25 times the normal speed.
2x . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . The video is played back at twice the
normal speed.
Summary View. . . . The played back speed is
automatically adjusted according to
the voice of the video.
To cancel Quick View, press l several times, or
perform âNormal playâ.
Fast forward
Rewind
Stop
Position to play
Position memory
The video is played back fast.
10x or 30x
To cancel fast forward playback, press Oo(
Switch TV/data BC
At player start-up
Video Mode
You can switch the contents on the viewer display.
Select an item.
If you set to âEnlarged V. img+DBCâ, the video on the
vertical display is enlarged.
If you operate âFast forwardâ or âRewindâ from the
Function menu while âData broadcastingâ is set, the
setting at Video Player start-up returns.
Even if you set to âData broadcastingâ, the audio from
video files is output.
You can set âCaptionâ from âUser settingsâ or while
watching a 1Seg program.
You can switch between Video Mode and Data
Broadcasting Mode while watching a video on the vertical
display.
Icon
See page 246.
Image quality
See page 246.
Sound
).
Sound effect
The video is played back fast in the opposite direction.
10x or 30x
To cancel rewind playback, press Oo(
).
Auto volume
See page 246.
Remaster
See page 246.
You can end playback.
Listening
See page 247.
You can set the start point for playing the video.
Use No to move the cursor position of the time bar
Oo(
To cancel, press r.
Equalizer
See page 247.
You can store a position memory in the video. Store it at
the desired position in pause state.
Position memory1 or Position memory2
Video info
See page 335.
Add desktop icon
See page 30.
336
At player start-up
When âCaptionâ is set
to âONâ:
V. img+Caption+DBC
When âCaptionâ is set
to âOFFâ:
Visual image+DBC
Main/sub sound
Main sound, Sub sound, or Main+sub sound
At player start-up
Main sound
Data broadcasting
Reload contents
You can reload the displayed data broadcasting site.
The confirmation display appears asking whether to
re-send the data you entered, depending on the site.
Certificate
See page 186.
Image display set.
See page 197.
Sound setting
See page 247.
Reset settings
See page 247.
Back to data BC
You can stop browsing the data broadcasting site and
return to the data broadcasting.
Information
You cannot execute Quick View for some video files.
It may be hard to hear sound during Quick View.
Depending on the video file, you might not be able to select the position to play.
When you have selected the part that was not recorded correctly owing to bad radio
wave conditions, the start point moves to the part where you can play back the video
correctly.
Displaying/Operating Chara-den Images
You can display stored Chara-den images.
You can make the Chara-den image move by key operation.
mData boxChara-denSelect a Chara-den image.
Chara-den
You can delete the pre-installed Chara-den image. You can re-download it from the
âP-SQUAREâ site (see page 193). When you use a UIM other than the one used for
downloading, the UIM security function (see page 37) is set for it.
Some Chara-den images synchronize their movement with your voice spoken into the
microphone.
Chara-den list
Chara-den display
â Key assignment of operating Chara-den
You can use the Action list to check the actions that you can operate.
The number of actions you can operate varies depending on the Chara-den image.
Key operation
Details
1âź9
Whole action: Expresses an action with whole of
the body.
s1âźs9âť1âť2
(Whole Action Mode)
11âź99âť1
(Parts Action Mode)
Parts action: Expresses an action with a part of
the body.
Suspends the running action.
Displays the Action list.
Makes a videophone call.
Records Chara-den images.
âť1 You cannot operate for the pre-installed Chara-den image.
âť2 Press s again to cancel the first s.
337
Data Management
Chara-den is an animation character representing yourself. You can send
it as your image during videophone calls.
You can use the Chara-den player to play it back and shoot it.
Data Management
Function Menu of the Chara-den List
Function Menu of the Chara-den Display
Chara-den call
See page 71.
Chara-den call
See page 71.
Substitute image
See page 71.
Substitute image
See page 71.
Rec. Chara-den
See page 338.
Rec. Chara-den
See page 338.
Edit title
Enter a title.
You can enter up to 18 full-pitch/36 half-pitch characters.
Add desktop icon
See page 30.
Action list
You can display the list of actions you can operate.
Highlight an action, and press Oo(
) to run the action;
and press l(
) to check the details of the action.
You can display the Action list also by pressing m.
Change action
You can switch the action modes between Whole Action Mode
( ) and Parts Action Mode ( ).
Chara-den info
You can display the title, file name, and others of the Chara-den
image.
Memory info
You can display the used memory space (estimate).
Add desktop icon
See page 30.
Delete
YES
Delete all
Enter your Terminal Security CodeYES
This operation deletes the pre-installed Chara-den image as
well.
Multiple-choice
You can select and delete multiple Chara-den images.
Put a check mark for Chara-den images to be deleted
i(
)DeleteYES
Display size
Reset title
You can set whether to display the Chara-den image in âActual
sizeâ or âFit in displayâ.
Actual size or Fit in display
You can reset the title to the default one.
YES
Information
âRec. file restrictionâ denotes whether to restrict the operation such as attaching still
images/moving pictures created by âRec. Chara-denâ to mail, saving them to microSD
card, or editing them.
If you delete a Chara-den image set for the substitute image except âăŤăłăŹăŤăź
(kangaroo)â, âăŤăłăŹăŤăź (kangaroo)â is set for the substitute image. If you delete âăŤ
ăłăŹăŤăź (kangaroo)â, a pre-installed substitute image will be sent.
338
At Chara-den
display
Whole Action
Mode
Chara-den info
See page 338.
Display size
See page 338.
Recording Chara-den Images
You can shoot the displayed Chara-den image as a still image or moving
picture.
mData boxChara-den
Select a Chara-den image to be shot
c(
You can select it also from the Function menu of the
Chara-den list or Chara-den display.
Chara-den
Recording display
Shoot Still Images
Display â
â on the Chara-den Recording display and
press Oo(
).
A still image of the displayed Chara-den image is shot.
While â
â is displayed, press c(
) to display â
Press Oo(
You can set the image size for recording and saving a still
Chara-den image. You can set only in Photo Mode.
QCIF (176 x 144) or Small (117 x 96)
Recording type
You can set whether to record video or voice for recording and
saving a Chara-den movie. You can set only in Movie Mode.
Video + voice or Video
Recording quality
You can set the image quality for saving a Chara-den movie. You
can set only in Movie Mode.
Normal, Prefer image quality, or Prefer motion speed
â.
).
The still image you have shot is saved to the âCameraâ folder.
Shoot Moving Pictures
Display â
â on the Chara-den Recording display and
pressOo(
).
Oo(
)Oo(
â.
The recorded moving picture is saved to the âCameraâ folder.
Information
The image size is fixed to QCIF (176 x 144).
In Manner Mode or when âPhoneâ or âMailâ of âRing volumeâ is set to âSilentâ, the
shutter tone does not sound.
When âRecording typeâ is set to âVideo + voiceâ, the voice is recorded as well.
Function Menu of the Chara-den Recording Display
Switch Chara-den
Select a Chara-den image to be displayed.
If you switch Chara-den images, the action mode switches to
Whole Action Mode.
Substitute image
See page 71.
Action list
See page 338.
Change action
See page 338.
Display size
See page 338.
Displaying Machi-chara Images
You can delete the pre-installed Machi-chara images. You can re-download it from the
âP-SQUAREâ site (see page 193). When you use a UIM other than the one used for
downloading, the UIM security function (see page 37) is set for it.
Data Management
Recording of the displayed Chara-den image starts.
While â
â is displayed, press c(
) to display â
Recording size
mData boxMachi-chara
Select a Machi-chara image.
Each time you press m from the Machi-chara list, you
can switch between the list for the FOMA terminal and
the microSD card.
The following images are displayed when you cannot
display a preview image.
No preview image
Incomplete download
See page 193 when you select âSearch by i-modeâ.
Machi-chara list
339
Function Menu of the Machi-chara List
Edit title
See page 319.
Preview
You can display the Machi-chara image.
Data Management
Set to Machi-chara You can set a Machi-chara image. (See page 106)
You can set it also by pressing l(
).
You cannot set Machi-chara images on the microSD card.
RLS Machi-chara
You can release a Machi-chara image from setting.
Machi-chara info
You can display the title, file name, and others of the Machi-chara
image.
Reset all info
You can reset information in the Machi-chara image.
(See page 106)
YES
Move to microSD
See page 350.
Move to phone
See page 350.
Move
See page 321.
Reset title
You can reset the title to the default.
YES
Delete this
See page 321.
Delete all
Enter your Terminal Security CodeYES
The pre-installed Machi-chara images are deleted as well.
Multiple-choice
See page 321.
Memory info
You can display the used memory space (estimate)/number of
stored items.
Sort
See page 321.
Listing
You can change the displayed contents on the Machi-chara list.
Title or Image
You can switch the contents also by pressing c(
).
340
Information
When you set to âăžăăŻăă (Dr. Bean)â which is a pre-installed Machi-chara image,
it is displayed in the Santa version from November 20 through December 25, 2009
and from November 20 through December 25, 2010.
+m-1-6
Playing a Melody
mData boxMelody
Select a folderSelect a melody.
Each time you press m from the Folder list, you can
switch between the folders in the FOMA terminal and
the microSD card.
See page 356 for the Function menu of the Folder list.
When you close the FOMA
terminal during playback,
the playback stops.
When selecting folders and
melodies by another
function, some folders or
melodies may not be
displayed depending on the
function. Some melodies
may be played back for
confirmation while being
selected, or you may at
times be able to play back
Melody list
the melody by pressing
l(
).
See page 193 when you select âSearch by i-modeâ.
Folder list
Melody Playback
display
Play Back Playlist
You can repeatedly play back the melodies selected by âEdit playlistâ.
mData boxMelodyPlaylist
â Operation while playing back a melody
Operation
Halt
Key operation
Oo(
), d, 0 through 9, a, s, lâť1,
Play melody
See page 340.
Set as ring tone
Select an incoming type.
ââ
â indicates the set item.
File restriction
You can set the file restrictions on the selected melody.
File unrestricted or File restricted
See page 225 for the file restrictions.
Add desktop icon
See page 30.
Attach to mail
You can compose an i-mode mail message with the selected
melody attached.
Go to step 2 on page 130.
You can compose it also by pressing l(
).
Send Ir data
See page 360.
m, c
Bo or >
Replay next fileâť2
Vo
transmission
See page 362.
Replay previous fileâť2
Co
Copy to microSD
See page 348.
Melody info
You can display the melody title, file name and others.
Copy to phone
See page 349.
Move to phone
See page 350.
Copy
You can copy the melody from a folder on the microSD card to
another folder on the microSD card.
Select a destination folder.
Memory info
You can display the used memory space (estimate)/number of
stored items.
Reset title
You can reset the title to the default.
YES
âť1 Halts the playback of melodies which cannot be attached to mail.
âť2 Valid when played back from the Melody list.
Information
The melodies are played back at the volume set for âPhoneâ of âRing volumeâ. When
âPhoneâ of âRing volumeâ is set to âSilentâ or âStepâ, they are played back at âLevel 2â.
However, the melody played back when it is selected does not sound.
Even if you change the volume while playing back, the volume set for âPhoneâ of
âRing volumeâ returns when you exit the Melody player.
Function Menu of the Melody List
Edit title
Edit file name
Edit the title.
For a file in the FOMA terminal, you can enter up to 31
full-pitch/63 half-pitch characters.
For a file on the microSD card, you can enter up to 18
full-pitch/36 half-pitch characters.
Edit the file name.
You can enter up to 36 (not including an extension) half-pitch
alphanumeric characters and symbols (only â.â,â-â,â_â).
Delete
Delete this
You can delete the melody stored in the FOMA terminal.
YES
Delete selected
You can select and delete multiple melodies stored in the
FOMA terminal.
Put a check mark for melodies to be deleted
l(
)YES
341
Data Management
Sound volume
adjustment
Data Management
Delete all
You can delete all melodies stored in the selected folder in the
FOMA terminal.
Enter your Terminal Security CodeYES
Delete this
You can delete the melody stored on the microSD card.
YES
Delete all
You can delete all melodies stored in the selected folder on
the microSD card.
Enter your Terminal Security CodeYES
Multiple-choice
You can select multiple melodies stored on the microSD card
and operate them.
Put a check mark for the melodies to be operated
i(
)Select an item.
Delete . . . . . . . See âDelete thisâ on page 342.
Copy . . . . . . . . See page 341.
Move . . . . . . . . See page 342.
Select all. . . . . You can select all melodies.
Release all . . . You can release all selected melodies.
Sort
You can change displayed order.
Select an order.
You cannot sort the files on the microSD card.
Move
You can move the melody to another folder.
Select a destination folder
Put a check mark for melodies to be moved
l(
)YES
Press l(
) to display folders at the second-tier level
or lower, if they exist. Press r to return to the upper level.
For the microSD card, you do not need to do the operations
of putting a check mark for the melodies and after.
Move to microSD
See page 350.
Information
When the icon of the acquired source is â
â or â
â and the icon such as â
â
â is displayed for that melody, you cannot change the file name.
You cannot use some characters and symbols for a file name.
342
â or
Information
You can set the file restrictions only to the melody with the acquired source icon â
â.
When the melody file exceeds 100 Kbytes by applying the restriction, you cannot set
the file restrictions.
You cannot attach the melody with â
â or â
â whose acquired source icon is
â
â or â
â, or the melody in excess of 100 Kbytes.
You may not be able to attach to i-mode mail even when the file restriction in the
melody information is âFile unrestrictedâ.
When a melody set for another function is deleted, the setting returns to the default.
(When the melody is set for an alarm tone of âScheduleâ, âToDoâ, or âTV timerâ, or for
âAlarmâ, it switches to âClock Alarm Toneâ.)
You cannot delete the pre-installed melody.
Function Menu of the Melody Playback Display
Attach to mail
See page 341.
Set as ring tone
See page 341.
Melody info
See page 341.
Copy to microSD
See page 348.
Copy to phone
See page 349.
Add desktop icon
See page 30.
Play all/
Play portion
You can temporarily switch the play start positions of the melody.
Checking Kisekae Tool
You can delete the pre-installed Kisekae Tool files. You can re-download them from
the âP-SQUAREâ site (see page 193). When you use a UIM other than the one used
for downloading, the UIM security function (see page 37) is set for them.
mData boxKisekae Tool
Select a Kisekae Tool file.
Information
Clock display cannot be played back as a demo.
Edit title
See page 319.
Preview
You can display the detailed Kisekae Tool display.
Set at one time/
Setting all
You can set Kisekae Tool files at one time. (See page 105)
You can set them at one time also by pressing l(
).
You cannot set Kisekae Tool files on the microSD card at one
time.
Kisekae Tool info
You can display the title, file name, and others of the Kisekae
Tool file.
File info
You can display the name and type of files.
Move to microSD
See page 350.
Move to phone
See page 350.
Reset title
You can reset the title to the default.
YES
Move
See page 321.
Delete this
See page 321.
Delete all
Enter your Terminal Security CodeYES
The pre-installed Kisekae Tool files are deleted as well.
Multiple-choice
See page 321.
Memory info
You can display the used memory space (estimate)/number of
stored items.
Sort
See page 321.
Listing
You can change the displayed contents on the Kisekae Tool list.
Title or Image
You can switch the contents also by pressing c(
from the Kisekae Tool list.
343
Data Management
When you highlight/select an
item from the detailed
Kisekae Tool display, each
setting content is played
back as a demo.
Each time you press m
from the Kisekae Tool list,
Kisekae Tool list
Detailed Kisekae
you can switch between the
Tool display
list for the FOMA terminal
and the microSD card. When you select a folder from the Folder list on the
microSD card, the Kisekae Tool list appears.
See page 356 for the Function menu of the Folder list.
The image on the right is displayed when you cannot display a
preview image.
See page 193 when you select âSearch by i-modeâ.
Function Menu of the Kisekae Tool List/Detailed Kisekae
Tool Display
microSD Card
Data Management
You need to obtain a microSD card separately to use the functions
related to the microSD card.
The microSD card is available at electronics retail stores, etc.
P-09A supports a commercial microSD card of up to 2 Gbytes and microSDHC card of
up to 16 Gbytes (As of April 2009).
For the latest operation check information such as the memory capacity and
manufacturers of microSD cards, access the following sites (in Japanese only). Note
that the microSD cards other than published in the sites might not correctly work.
ăťFrom i-mode to P-SQUARE (As of April 2009)
iMenu â ăĄăăĽăźăŞăšă (Menu List)
â ăąăźăżă¤éťčŠąăĄăźăŤăź (Mobile Phone Maker) â P-SQUARE
ăťFrom personal computers
http://panasonic.jp/mobile/
Note that the published information is the result obtained from the
QR code for
accessing the site
operation check, which does not necessarily guarantee all
performances of those microSD cards.
During processing of the card, â â is displayed. During processing of the card, never
remove the microSD card, or turn off the FOMA terminal. Check that processing of the
card does not go on before turning off the FOMA terminal, and then remove the
microSD card.
When the FOMA terminal or microSD card has many data files, it may take longer to
access the files.
See page 355 for the number of files and time that can be saved to the microSD card.
The microSD card has an operating life. If you use the microSD card for a long time,
you may not be able to write new data on it, or the card may be disabled.
With the FOMA terminal, you can save the downloaded still images, i-motion files,
movie files, melodies, Kisekae Tool files, Machi-chara images, Chaku-uta FullÂŽ music
files, and i-Îąppli programs with the file restrictions to the microSD card. You cannot
save the files IPs (Information Providers) do not permit.
Information
Note that formatting deletes all the contents on the microSD card.
If you read/write data from/on a microSD card using a device other than this FOMA
terminal, the microSD card might become unusable depending on the device or
operations.
When you insert a microSD card which has been used with another device such as a
personal computer into P-09A, new files and folders to be used in P-09A are created.
Inserting/Removing microSD Card
â Inserting
To open the cover of the
microSD card slot, and then
turn it in the direction arrow.
With the metal terminal
surface facing downward,
make sure that the cut edge is
positioned at right and then
insert.
Information
You may not be able to use the microSD card formatted using a personal computer
and other devices. Be sure to use the microSD card formatted with P-09A.
344
Push it until it clicks.
Close the cover of the microSD card slot.
â Removing
Open the cover following
step 1 of ââ Insertingâ and
push the microSD card until it
stops.
By pushing all the way in, the microSD card
pops out.
Remove the microSD card.
Displaying Data Items on microSD Card
You can display the Phonebook entries, schedule events, ToDo items,
mail messages, text memos, and bookmarks stored on the microSD card.
You can operate in the same way on the detailed Phonebook display, detailed mail
display, and detailed Bookmark display as when you display data stored in your FOMA
terminal.
See page 86 for detailed operations of the Phonebook.
See page 156 for detailed operations of mail.
See page 189 for detailed operations of bookmarks.
mLifeKitmicroSDRefer microSD data
Select a category.
â Icons on the display
The following icons appear when you insert the microSD card:
: You can save and read data.
: The microSD card is write-protected. You cannot save data, and execute âCheck
microSDâ and âmicroSD formatâ.
: You cannot use the microSD card. Remove the microSD card and then insert it
again.
If â â is still displayed, execute âCheck microSDâ or âmicroSD formatâ.
Category list
microSD File display
(For Phonebook)
Select a fileSelect a data item.
Information
Do not insert or remove the microSD card with the FOMA terminal turned on. It may
damage the microSD card or its data.
Note that microSD card may pop out when you insert or remove it.
Check the direction of the microSD card, and then insert or remove it straight. If you
obliquely insert the microSD card into the slot, the microSD card may be damaged.
It may take long to initially read or write data after inserting the microSD card.
Data list
(For Phonebook)
Detailed data display
(For Phonebook)
345
Data Management
If you select âScheduleâ,
ToDo items are also
displayed.
Function Menu of the Category List/microSD File Display/
Data List/Detailed Data Display
Edit title
Enter a title.
You can enter up to 15 full-pitch/31 half-pitch characters.
Add to phone
See page 347.
Data Management
Overwrite to phone See page 348.
Add one to phone
See page 347.
Add all to phone
See page 347.
Overwr. all to ph.
See page 347 and page 348.
Copy to microSD
See page 346.
Copy to phone
See page 347.
Delete this
YES
Delete all
You can delete all files in the currently displayed category.
Enter your Terminal Security CodeYES
microSD info
See page 353.
Property
You can display the detailed data display.
microSD format
See page 352.
Check microSD
See page 353.
Copy Data Items in the FOMA Terminal to the microSD
Card
You can copy the Phonebook entries, schedule events, ToDo items, mail
messages, text memos, and bookmarks stored in the FOMA terminal to
the microSD card.
Copy one to microSD
You can copy a single file from the FOMA terminal onto the microSD
card. A copied data item is saved as a single file.
You cannot copy the secret code stored in a Phonebook entry.
Display for a data item to be copiedi(
Copy to microSDYES
To copy a Phonebook entry, scheduled event, or mail message, select âMove/
copyâ from the Function menu and then select âCopy to microSDâ.
To copy a bookmark, select âCopyâ from the Function menu and then select
âCopy to microSDâ.
Copy all to microSD
You can copy the data items of the category selected on the Category list
or of the category displayed on the microSD File display from the FOMA
terminal to the microSD card. The copied data items are all saved as a
single file.
You cannot copy secret codes or voice dial entries stored in the
Phonebook entries.
Category list/microSD File displayi(
Copy to microSD
Enter your Terminal Security CodeYES
To copy scheduled events, select âScheduleâ, âToDoâ, or âAllâ (Schedule and
ToDo).
To copy bookmarks, select âi-mode Browserâ, âFull Browserâ, or âAllâ (i-mode and
Full Browser).
Information
When you copy a file stored as secret data, the file is copied as an ordinary file.
346
Information
When you copy all files, the files stored as secret data are also copied.
When you copy all the Phonebook entries, the contents of âOwn numberâ are also
copied.
For copying mail, some files attached to mail may be deleted depending on file format.
When you copy mail containing links to start an i-Îąppli program, the information about
starting the i-Îąppli program in that mail is deleted.
During copying, the FOMA terminal is placed in the same status as it is out of the
service area.
Copy Data Items on the microSD Card to the FOMA
Terminal
You can copy the Phonebook entries, schedule events, ToDo items, mail
messages, text memos, and bookmarks stored on the microSD card to
the FOMA terminal.
See page 355 for the number of data items that can be saved to the microSD card.
Data list/Detailed data displayi(
Add one to phone or Copy to phoneYES
microSD File displayi(
)Add to phone
Enter your Terminal Security CodeYES
or
Data listi(
)Add all to phone
Enter your Terminal Security CodeYES
Overwrite all to phone
You can copy all data items in all files of the category selected on the
Category list or all data items in all files displayed on the microSD File
display to the FOMA terminal.
Note that the data items already stored in the FOMA terminal are
overwritten and deleted.
Category list/microSD File displayi(
Overwr. all to ph.
Enter your Terminal Security CodeYESYES
To copy from the detailed data display of a Phonebook entry, select âMove/copyâ
from the Function menu and then select âCopy to phoneâ.
Add all to phone
You can copy all data items in all files of the category selected on the
Category list or all data items in all files displayed on the microSD File
display to the FOMA terminal.
The copied data items are added to the FOMA terminal.
Category list/microSD File displayi(
Add all to phone
Enter your Terminal Security CodeYES
347
Data Management
Add one to phone
You can copy the data item selected on the data list or displayed on the
detailed data display to the FOMA terminal.
Add to phone
You can copy all data items in a file selected on the microSD File display
or all data items displayed on the data list to the FOMA terminal.
The copied data items are added to the FOMA terminal.
Overwrite to phone
You can copy all data items in a file selected on the microSD File display
or all data items displayed on the data list to the FOMA terminal.
Note that the data items already stored in the FOMA terminal are
overwritten and deleted.
microSD File displayi(
Overwrite to phone
Enter your Terminal Security CodeYESYES
or
Data listi(
)Overwr. all to ph.
Enter your Terminal Security CodeYESYES
Data Management
Information
If the memory capacity of the FOMA terminal runs short during copying, copying is
suspended midway; however, the data already copied is stored.
When you perform âAdd one to phoneâ for a Phonebook entry, any group is not set if
the group number or group name stored in the microSD file differs from that stored on
the FOMA terminal.
When you overwrite the Phonebook entries, the voice dial entries are deleted.
If the maximum number/size of storage are exceeded when you copy a received mail
message, they are deleted in order of mail in the âTrash boxâ folder and older received
mail. However, unread or protected mail messages are not deleted.
If the maximum number/size of storage are exceeded when you copy a sent mail
message, they are deleted in order of older sent mail. However, protected mail
messages are not deleted.
When you copy a file stored in another model, the folder-sort setting may not be
reflected.
When you execute âAdd all to phoneâ, you cannot copy the bookmarks of the same
URL.
If the number of files stored on the microSD card increases, it may take long to read or
write data.
During copying, the FOMA terminal is placed in the same status as it is out of the
service area.
348
Copying Still Images, Moving Pictures, etc.
Copy Files from the FOMA Terminal to the microSD Card
The destination folder and file name are as follows:
Still image
(DCF standard)
Still image
(Non DCF standard)
Still image
(Deco-mail pictogram)
i-motion file
(With video)
i-motion file
(Without video)
Melody
PDF file
Decome-Anime template
The destination folder in the âPictureâ folder
PXXXXXXX (X denotes a numeral.)
The destination folder in the âImage Boxâ folder
STILXXXX (X denotes a numeral.)
The destination folder in the âDeco-mail pictogramsâ folder
DIMGXXXX (X denotes a numeral.)
The destination folder in the âSD videoâ folder
MOLXXX (X denotes an alpha-numeral.)
The destination folder in the âOther contentsâ folder
MMFXXXX (X denotes a numeral.)
The destination folder
RINGXXXX (X denotes a numeral.)
The destination folder
The same file name as the one in the FOMA terminal
The destination folder
DEATXXXX (X denotes a numeral.)
When you copy or move a file between the FOMA terminal and the microSD card, its
file format might change.
Still Image list/Still image in play/i-motion list/Melody list/
Melody during playback/PDF File list/Decome-Anime
Template listi(
)Copy to microSD
If you have used âMultiple-choiceâ to select files to be copied, you can copy the
multiple files at a time.
Information
You can copy JPEG, GIF, SWF, MP4, MFi, SMF, PDF files and Decome-Anime
templates in the âi-modeâ folder, âCameraâ folder, âDeco-mail pictureâ folder,
âDeco-mail pictogramsâ folder and a user folder.
You can copy multiple JPEG, GIF, SWF and MP4 files at a time but not others.
When the files in the destination folder are stored to the maximum, a new folder is
automatically created and files are saved to that folder. For the files other than still
images or Decome-Anime template, the message âStorage is changed to XXXXXXXâ
(XXXXXXX denotes a folder name) appears when copying is completed.
You cannot copy the following files:
ăťFiles that you shot Chara-den images whose âRec. file restrictionâ is âFile restrictedâ
ăťFiles whose output from the FOMA terminal is prohibited
ăťFiles set with playback restrictions
ăťPartially saved i-motion files or Chaku-uta FullÂŽ music files
ăťPDF files partially downloaded page by page
When you copy a file to the microSD card, the file size may become larger.
Still Image list/Still image in play/i-motion list/i-motion
file in pause/i-motion file at the end of playback/Melody
list/Melody during playback/PDF File list/Decome-Anime
Template list, which is on the microSD card
i(
)Copy to phone
If you have used âMultiple-choiceâ to select files to be copied, you can copy the
multiple files at a time.
See page 194 when images/i-motion files/melodies/PDF files are stored to the
maximum.
349
Data Management
Copy Files from the microSD Card to the FOMA Terminal
You can copy files from the microSD card to the i-mode folder in the
FOMA terminal. (Deco-mail pictograms are copied to the âăć°ăŤĺ
Ľă
(Favorite)â folder in the âDeco-mail pictogramsâ folder and
Decome-Anime templates are copied to the âPhoneâ folder.)
Information
Do not pull out the microSD card during copying.
You can copy JPEG, GIF, SWF, MP4, MFi, SMF, PDF files and Decome-Anime
templates. However, you cannot copy a melody in excess of 100Kbytes and an SWF
file in excess of 500 Kbytes.
You can copy multiple JPEG, GIF, SWF and MP4 files only at a time. However, you
cannot copy multiple i-motion files of ASF format, VGA (640 x 480) and HVGA Wide
(640 x 352), or in excess of 10 Mbytes.
When you copy i-motion files, they are cut out, converted, or shrunk, so their file size
may become larger or smaller. However, an i-motion file whose video codec is H.264
is copied without being converted or shrunk.
When you copy VGA (640 x 480) or HVGA Wide (640 x 352) of an i-motion file, the
image is converted into QVGA (320 x 240). When you copy VGA (640 x 480) or
HVGA Wide (640 x 352) of an i-motion file, ASF file, or the file in excess of 10 Mbytes,
it might take a longer time.
You cannot copy the i-motion file in excess of 10 Mbytes in the following cases:
ăťWhen the video codec is H.264
ăťWhen the audio codec is AAC, AAC+ (HE-AAC), or Enhanced aacPlus
ăťWhen the bit rate of the i-motion file is in excess of the restriction
ăťWhen searching (fast forward or fast rewind) is disabled
ăťWhen the file is other than VGA (640 x 480), HVGA Wide (640 x 352), QVGA (320 x
240), QCIF (176 x 144) or Sub-QCIF (128 x 96)
Some i-motion files cannot be copied in the conditions other than the above.
Playing back a copied ASF file may take a longer time.
The file after copying takes the title of the one set on the microSD card. When no title
is set on the microSD card or the default title is unknown, the file name will be the title.
Information
Moving Copyrighted Files
Move Files in the FOMA Terminal to the microSD Card
You can move the copyrighted file obtained from a site to the microSD
card after encoding. The moved file is then saved to the destination
folder in the âMovable contentsâ folder (the specified destination folder
for Chaku-uta FullÂŽ music files).
Some files you moved to the microSD card can be operated only with the
UIM you used when moving, and others can be operated only with the
UIM and the phone you used when moving.
Data Management
Still image list/i-motion list/Machi-chara list/Melody list/
Kisekae Tool list/PDF File list/Chaku-uta FullÂŽ Music list
i(
)Move to microSDOK
Information
You can move a file to the microSD card only when the acquired source icon is â
Partially saved i-motion files, Chaku-uta FullÂŽ music files, Kisekae Tool files,
Machi-chara images and PDF files cannot be moved to the microSD card.
The setting is released if you move a file set for another function.
â.
You can move a copyrighted file (with file restriction) to the FOMA terminal only if its
property for âMoved to phoneâ is âAvailableâ or âAvailable (Same model)â. However,
you cannot move a file of âAvailable (Same model)â to the FOMA terminal other than
P-09A. See âPicture infoâ, âimotion infoâ, âMachi-chara infoâ, âMelody infoâ, âKisekae
Tool infoâ, âFile infoâ, âMusic infoâ, or âDocument infoâ to check whether the file is
âAvailableâ, âUnavailableâ or âAvailable (Same model)â.
The setting is released if you move a file set for another function.
The moved files are saved to the âi-modeâ folder. However, the Machi-chara images
are saved to the âMachi-charaâ folder, the Kisekae Tool files are saved to the âKisekae
Toolâ folder in Data Box and Chaku-uta FullÂŽ music files are saved to the âInitial
folderâ in the âi-modeâ folder.
Move i-Îąppli in the FOMA Terminal to the microSD Card
Some i-Îąppli programs can be moved to and saved to the microSD card.
You cannot start the i-Îąppli program moved to the microSD card. Move it
back to your FOMA terminal to start. However, some i-Îąppli programs
can be operated only with the UIM you used when moving, and some
other programs can be operated only with the UIM and the phone you
used when moving.
Software listi(
)Move to microSDYES
Move Files from the microSD Card to the FOMA Terminal
You can move a copyrighted file from the microSD card to the âi-modeâ
folder in the FOMA terminal.
Still Image list/i-motion list/Machi-chara list/Melody list/
Kisekae Tool list/PDF File list/Chaku-uta FullÂŽ Music list,
which is on the microSD cardi(
Move to phone
See page 194 when files are stored to the maximum.
350
Move i-Îąppli from the microSD Card to the FOMA
Terminal
You can move an i-Îąppli program from the microSD card to the FOMA
terminal.
Software listi(
)Move to phoneYESOK
Back up/Restore Data Files Collectively
You can back up the Phonebook entries, schedule events, ToDo items,
mail messages, text memos, bookmarks, setting contents/information
stored in the FOMA terminal to the microSD card collectively. The backup
files are saved as a single file by category. When you restore those files,
they are collectively restored to the FOMA terminal.
Back up Data Files to the microSD Card
mLifeKitmicroSDBackup/Restore
Backup to microSD
You cannot create backup files when no data files available for backup are stored
in the FOMA terminal.
Enter your Terminal Security CodeYES
When you select âCancelâ to cancel the backup, the backup files already created
are deleted.
When backup is completed, the saved date/time of the backup file is displayed.
Restore Backup Files to FOMA terminal
mLifeKitmicroSDBackup/Restore
Restore to phone
You cannot restore the files if no backup files or only the interrupted backup files
are on the microSD card.
Enter your Terminal Security CodeYES
When restoring is completed, the restored setting contents/information are
displayed. When you select âOKâ, or press r or h, the confirmation display
appears asking whether to create the learned words list. Select âYESâ to perform
âCreate learned wd listâ.
When you select âCancelâ to cancel restoring, the files already restored remain in
the FOMA terminal, but you cannot resume restoring from the interrupted point.
To restore all the data files, perform âRestore to phoneâ again.
When you restore the backup files which contain no sent mail messages, the
confirmation display asking whether to create the learned words list does not
appear.
Information
When the volume of backup files is larger than the memory space of your FOMA
terminal, some backup files are not restored.
When the backup files contain the files unsupported by the FOMA terminal, the
unsupported files are not restored.
When you restore backup files to other than P-09A, all the backup files and setting
contents/information may not be restored.
351
Data Management
Each time you perform âBackup to microSDâ, the old backup file is deleted and the new
one is created.
As the backup files are collectively created for all categories, the backup file for the
category which does not contain any data is also created. When you restore such a file,
the category which does not contain any data is overwritten as well.
During backup/restoring, the FOMA terminal is placed in the same status as it is out of
the service area.
Backup/restoring of settings contents/information for the following functions is
executed, however, some setting contents/information might be reset after restoring:
ăťRedial
ăťSent address
ăťAuto-display
ăťReceived Calls
ăťReceived address
ăťâReceive settingâ, âBeep
ăťRecord message setting ăťAuto-sort
timeâ, and âManner/Public
ăťâMailâ of Font size setting ăťSet check new messages
mode setâ of Area Mail
ăťRestrictions
ăťAttachment preference
setting
ăťCall setting w/o ID
ăťAuto-start attachment
ăťAlarm
ăťReject unknown
ăťSignature
ăťOwn dictionary
Information
If the battery goes flat during backup, the backup is suspended and the backup
file already created is saved as the interrupted backup file. However, you cannot
resume backup from the interrupted point, so start the whole backup again to
complete the backup.
If the microSD card runs out of space during backup, the backup files already
created are deleted, and the backup is suspended. In this case, delete
unnecessary data files on the microSD card, and then start the backup again.
If any backup files or interrupted backup files are on the microSD card, it may take
long to finish the backup.
Delete Backup Files
You can delete the backup files or interrupted backup files on the
microSD card.
mLifeKitmicroSDBackup/Restore
Delete backup data
Enter your Terminal Security CodeYES
Data Management
mData boxSD other filesSelect a folder.
Folder list
SD Other File list
Function Menu of the SD Other File List
Edit title
See page 319.
File info
You can display the name and type of files.
Attach to mail
You can compose an i-mode mail message with the file attached.
Go to step 2 on page 130.
You can compose it also by pressing l(
).
352
See page 321.
Delete this
See page 321.
Delete all
See page 321.
Multiple-choice
See page 321.
Memory info
You can display the used memory space (estimate).
Formatting microSD Card
Managing Unsupported Files
You can save various files unsupported by the FOMA terminal or files in
BMP or PNG format downloaded from sites, to the microSD card. (See
page 146 and page 192)
You can attach the saved files to an i-mode mail message to send, or
check them on a personal computer.
See page 356 for the
Function menu of the
Folder list.
You cannot display the
contents of the file using
the FOMA terminal.
See page 320.
Move
Copy
When you use the microSD card for the first time, you need to format
(initialize) it. Be sure to use P-09A for formatting. The microSD card
formatted using other devices such as personal computers may not be
used properly.
Note that formatting deletes all the contents on the microSD card.
mLifeKitmicroSDRefer microSD data
i(
)microSD format
Enter your Terminal Security CodeYES
Information
Do not remove the microSD card during formatting. Malfunction of the FOMA terminal
or microSD card could result.
If you press +l(
) or -h, or receive a voice call or videophone call while
formatting the microSD card, formatting is canceled. Format it again.
Files that have been saved to the microSD card whose formatting is suspended
becomes unfixed.
You cannot format an incompatible memory card.
Required folders are automatically created when you save data to the microSD card
after formatting.
Checking microSD Card
You can check and recover the microSD card.
mLifeKitmicroSDRefer microSD data
i(
)Check microSDYES
Information
By connecting the microSD card to the microSD card adapter, you can
use the microSD card on a personal computer which supports SD card.
The microSD card adapter is available at electronics retail stores, etc.
For installing the microSD card adapter, refer to the instruction manual
for the microSD card adapter.
Use FOMA Terminal as microSD Reader/Writer
With a microSD card inserted, connect the FOMA terminal to a personal
computer; then you can read the data from or write the data onto the
microSD card.
The following equipment is required:
Connector Cable: FOMA USB Cable with Charge Function 01/02 (option)
Personal Computer: Personal computer having the USB port (Universal Serial Bus
Specification Rev 1.1/2.0âť compliant) that can be connected with
the FOMA USB Cable with Charge Function 01/02 (option)
âťThis FOMA terminal does not support âUSB2.0 High-Speedâ.
Compatible Operating Systems: Windows 2000, Windows XP, Windows Vista
(Japanese version in each)
When you set to âmicroSD modeâ, â â appears on the Stand-by display.
To save WMA files from your personal computer to the microSD card, set to
âMTP modeâ. When you set to âMTP modeâ, â â appears on the Stand-by
display.
To use the FOMA terminal for packet communication, 64K data communication,
data sending/receiving (OBEX⢠communication), and for calls with USB
Hands-free compatible device, set mode to âCommunication modeâ.
Displaying Capacity of microSD Card
You can display the used and unused memory space (estimate) on the
microSD card.
mLifeKitmicroSDRefer microSD data
i(
)microSD info
Information
As the microSD card contains the system files for the card, the memory space is
smaller than that described on the microSD card even if it contains no data.
mSet./ServiceOther settingsUSB mode setting
microSD mode
Connect the FOMA terminal to a personal computer
using the FOMA USB Cable with Charge Function 01/02
(option).
The personal computer recognizes the microSD card.
â
â appears on the desktop, and â â appears on the Stand-by display.
Also, â â is displayed while the microSD card is in the FOMA terminal.
353
Data Management
Do not remove the microSD card during Check microSD. Malfunction of the FOMA
terminal or microSD card could result.
You cannot execute Check microSD for the unformatted microSD card or
incompatible memory card.
When you execute Check microSD, the microSD card may not be recovered
correctly, the data existed before executing Check microSD may be deleted, or the
microSD card itself may be initialized depending on the condition of the microSD card.
If you press +l(
) or -h, or receive a voice call or videophone call during
Check microSD, Check microSD is canceled.
If you cancel Check microSD midway, data not recovered may remain. In this case,
try Check microSD again.
It may take long to complete Check microSD depending on the data volume stored on
the microSD card.
Using a microSD Card with a Personal
Computer
Information
Data Management
If the FOMA terminal and personal computer are not correctly connected, or the
remaining battery level of the FOMA terminal shows very low or goes flat, you cannot
send or receive data. In addition, you may lose data.
While data is being read or written, do not pull the FOMA USB Cable with Charge
Function 01/02 off. Not only you cannot send or receive data, but also you may lose
the data.
While data is being read or written, you cannot set this function. Further, make sure
that you do not âReset settingsâ or âInitializeâ during reading/writing. Malfunction of the
microSD card could result.
When âMTP modeâ is set, you cannot reset functions by âReset settingsâ. When you
turn on the power after removing the battery, the mode is set to âCommunication
modeâ.
You cannot read from/write to a personal computer while reading from/writing to the
FOMA terminal, and vice versa.
To use the DOCOMO keitai datalink, set it to âCommunication modeâ.
Folder Configuration on microSD Card
The FOMA terminal creates the following folders on the microSD card to
save data files. When you write files to the microSD card from a personal
computer, you need to write in the specified folder configuration and file
names.
aaa: A three-digit half-pitch numeral of 100 through 999 (Use the same numerals for the
folder name, and for the file name saved to that folder.)
bbb: A three-digit half-pitch numeral of 001 through 999
ccc: A three-digit half-pitch alpha-numeral (hexadecimal numeralâť)
ddddd: A five-digit half-pitch numeral of 00001 through 65535
eeee and ffff: A four-digit half-pitch alpha-numeral (hexadecimal numeralsâť)
gggg: A four-digit half-pitch numeral of 0001 through 9999
###: Extension
âťThe hexadecimal numerals are carried up every 16, unlike the way the decimal
numerals are carried up every 10. They are indicated by half-pitch numerals of 0
through 9 and half-pitch alphabets of A through F.
Using a personal computer, you can write a file name of up to 64 bytes (including
extension) of free characters for a PDF file, SD other file, movie file, Word file, Excel file
and PowerPoint file. However, you cannot use following characters:
/,:;ďź?â <>ď˝
354
DCIM (Folder for DCF standard still images)
aaa_PANA
Paaagggg.### (Extension is JPG, or GIF.)
MISC [DPOF folder (This folder is created automatically when âDPOF settingâ on
page 369 is set.)]
SD_VIDEO (Folder for moving pictures)
PRLccc (Folder for i-motion files)
MOLccc.### (Extension is 3GP, SDV, ASF, or MP4.)
MGR_INFO (Folder for video management information)
PRGccc (Folder for videos)
PRIVATE
DOCOMO
STILL (Folder for non-DCF standard still images)
SUDbbb
STILgggg.### (Extension is JPG, GIF, or SWF.)
DOCUMENT (Folder for PDF files)
PUDbbb
PDFDCbbb.PDF
RINGER (Folder for melodies)
RUDbbb
RINGgggg.### (Extension is MLD, or SMF.)
TORUCA (Folder for ToruCa files)
TRCbbb
TORUCbbb.TRC
MMFILE [Folder for non-SD-VIDEO standard motion pictures (include music
data of AAC format)]
MUDbbb
MMFgggg.### (Extension is 3GP, SDV, ASF, or MP4.)
WM_SYSTEM
WM
DECOIMG (Folder for Deco-mail pictograms)
DUDbbb
DIMGgggg.### (Extension is JPG, or GIF.)
OTHER (Folder for SD other files)
OUDbbb
OTHERbbb.### (Extension is up to three-digit half-pitch alphabets that the
FOMA terminal cannot recognize.)
SD_PIM (Folder for Phonebook entries, schedule events, ToDo items, mail
messages, text memos, and bookmarks)
PIMddddd.### (Extension is VCF for Phonebook entries, VCS for schedule events
and ToDo items, VMG for mail messages, VNT for text memos, and
VBM for bookmarks.)
SD_AUDIO (Folder for SD-Audio)
SD_BIND (Folder for i-Îąppli or movable contents)
SVCddddd
eeeeffff
â The number of files and time that can be saved to the microSD card
File
Still image (DCF standard)
Folder
Number of
savable files/time
DCIM
See page 505.
Moving picture (i-motion)
SD_VIDEO
See page 507.
Moving picture (Video)
SD_VIDEO
See page 240.
SD-Audio
SD_AUDIO
See page 261.
Still image (Non-DCF standard)
Moving picture (Non-SD-VIDEO standard)
Movie file
STILL
MMFILE
MOVIE
Melody
RINGER
PDF file
DOCUMENT
Word, Excel, PowerPoint file
PMC
ToruCa file
TORUCA
Deco-mail pictogram
DECOIMG
Decome-Anime template
DECO_A_T
SD other file
OTHER
Phonebook entry, schedule event, ToDo item,
mail message, text memo, bookmark
SD_PIM
i-Îąppli, Movable contents
SD_BIND
Approx. 58,390âť
âťYou can save up to approx. 65,500 files to the microSDHC card of 4 Gbytes or larger.
The number of savable files and time for saving vary depending on the memory
capacity of the microSD card. You can save more files by adding folders to save files to.
You might not be able to save the maximum number of files depending on the file size.
You can check used and unused space of the microSD card by âmicroSD infoâ.
355
Data Management
MOVIE (Folder for movie files)
MVUDbbb
MOVIEbbb.### (Extension is WMV, WMA, WVX, WAX, ASF, or ASX.)
DECO_A_T (Folder for Decome-Anime templates)
DTUDbbb
DEATgggg.VGT
BACKUP (Folder for batch backup files)
SD_PIM
ADDRESS (Folder for Phonebook batch backup files)
ADDRESS.VCF
SCHEDULE (Folder for schedule and ToDo batch backup files)
SCHEDULE.VCS
MAIL
INBOX (Folder for received mail batch backup files)
INBOX.VMG
SENTBOX (Folder for sent mail batch backup files)
SENTBOX.VMG
OUTBOX (Folder for unsent mail batch backup files)
OUTBOX.VMG
NOTE (Folder for text memo batch backup files)
NOTE.VNT
BOOKMARK (Folder for bookmark batch backup files)
BOOKMARK.VBM
SETTING (Folder for setting contents batch backup files)
SETTING.VNT
TABLE (Folder for additional information)
MEIGROUP
PMC
DOCUMENT (Folder for Word, Excel, or PowerPoint files)
DOCbbb
DOCDCbbb.### (Extension is XLS, DOC, or PPT.)
TABLE
DOCUMENT
Data Management
Information
Folder and file names may be displayed in lowercase characters depending on the
personal computer you use.
When the personal computer is set not to display extensions and hidden folders,
change the setting and then operate. For how to change the setting, refer to the
instruction manual for your personal computer or Help.
Do not use the personal computer to delete or move the folders on the microSD card.
The microSD card might not be read by P-09A.
You cannot see the files in the âSD_AUDIOâ, âSD_BINDâ and âPRGcccâ folders on a
personal computer, as they are encrypted.
When you save data in the âPRGcccâ folder by using a personal computer, you might
not be able to delete the video using the FOMA terminal.
When you delete, overwrite, or write a file on a personal computer, ensure that you do
not use the same file name you have once used. Even when you have deleted that
file, use a different file name.
Each time you perform âBackup to microSDâ, all folders and files in the âBACKUPâ
folder are deleted and new ones are created. When you perform âDelete backup
dataâ, all folders and files in the âBACKUPâ folder are deleted.
On the FOMA terminal, you might not be able to display or play back a data item
which was saved to the microSD card from other devices. On other devices, you
might not be able to display or play back a data item which was saved to the microSD
card from the FOMA terminal.
To procure a microSD reader/writer or PC card read adapter, inquire respective
manufacturers for the operation of microSD card beforehand.
Function Menu of the Folder List
Add folder
You can create a user folder.
Enter a folder name.
You can enter up to 10 full-pitch/20 half-pitch characters in
the FOMA terminal.
You can enter up to 31 full-pitch/63 half-pitch characters on
the microSD card. You can enter up to 10 full-pitch/20
half-pitch characters for a folder in the âMovable contentsâ
folder.
Edit folder name
You can edit the name of a user folder, or a folder in the
âDeco-mail pictogramsâ folder in the FOMA terminal.
Enter a folder name.
You can enter up to 10 full-pitch/20 half-pitch characters in
the FOMA terminal.
You can enter up to 31 full-pitch/63 half-pitch characters on
the microSD card. You can enter up to 10 full-pitch/20
half-pitch characters for a folder in the âMovable contentsâ
folder.
Delete folder
Delete this
You can delete the highlighted user folder.
Enter your Terminal Security CodeYES
Delete selected
Put a check mark for user folders to be deleted
l(
)Enter your Terminal Security Code
YES
Delete all
You can delete all user folders.
Enter your Terminal Security CodeYES
Managing Folders
Files in My picture, MUSIC, imotion/Movie, Melody, My documents (SD),
Kisekae Tool (SD), Machi-chara (SD), Document viewer, and SD other
files in Data Box are managed in the respective folders.
See page 263 for folder operations of MUSIC.
Even when the files in the âMovable contentsâ folder are listed, the Function menu in
the Folder list is displayed.
Folder security
[My picture/
imotion/Movie]
You can set the folder to open only when you enter your
Terminal Security Code.
Enter your Terminal Security CodeYES
The folder changes to â
â.
To release it, perform the same operation.
Send all Ir data
See page 361.
[My picture/
imotion/Movie/Melody]
356
DEL all frm folder
[My picture only]
You can delete all the files in the folder selected in âi-modeâ,
âCameraâ, âDeco-mail pictureâ, âDeco-mail pictogramsâ, and
user folder in âMy pictureâ.
Enter your Terminal Security CodeYES
Edit playlist
[Melody only]
You can select up to 10 melodies and program them in order
as you like. This is displayed while you are selecting âPlaylistâ.
Select a playing order from <1st> through <10th>
Select a folderSelect a melody.
To release a programmed melody, select âRelease thisâ.
Repeat the operations and complete the playlist editing
l(
You can release all the programmed melodies from the
playlist. This is displayed while you are selecting âPlaylistâ.
YES
Select storage
You can set the destination folder for when you save to the
microSD card.
YES
Memory info
You can display the used memory space (estimate)/number of
stored items.
You can display them also by pressing c(
).
Information
You can add up to 20 folders in the FOMA terminal. However, you can add up to 19
folders in âimotion/Movieâ.
You cannot add folders on the microSD card in the following cases:
ăťWhen 900 folders are contained in âPictureâ
ăťWhen 4,095 folders are contained in âSD videoâ
ăťWhen 999 folders are contained in âImage Boxâ, âDeco-mail pictogramsâ, âMelodyâ,
âOther contentsâ, âMy documentsâ, âDocument viewerâ, or âSD other filesâ
357
Data Management
Release playlist
[Melody only]
Information
You cannot edit the Folder-Security-activated folder name.
All data files in the user folder are deleted.
When you select this function on the microSD card, âDelete thisâ is performed.
When a melody set for another function is deleted, the setting returns to the default.
(When the melody is set for an alarm tone of âScheduleâ, âToDoâ or âTV timerâ, or for
âAlarmâ, it switches to âClock Alarm Toneâ.)
You can set it only for âi-modeâ, âCameraâ, user folder, and âVoice recorderâ.
When you select a folder with folder security, the display for entering your Terminal
Security Code appears. Enter your Terminal Security Code to temporarily release
folder security.
If you change or delete the file name, title, or contents of the melody stored in the
playlist, all the melodies are released from the playlist.
The following icons are displayed for the folder set as a destination folder:
â
â . . . Folders in the âPictureâ folder and âSD videoâ folder
â
â . . . Folders in âDocument viewerâ, and âSD other filesâ
Folders in the âDeco-mail pictogramsâ folder, âImage Boxâ folder, âMovieâ
folder, âMelodyâ folder, and âMy documentsâ folder
â
â . . . Folders in the âKisekae Toolâ and âMachi-Charaâ
Folders in the âMovable contentsâ folder
â
â . . . Folders in the âOther contentsâ folder
When you execute Check microSD, or create or edit a folder by using a personal
computer, the destination folder on the microSD card might be changed. When the
setting is changed, set the destination folder again.
â List of data files you can transfer
Data Management
Using Infrared Communication
Transfer terms
One item
Multiple
items
All items
Phonebook (Own number)
â
â
Up to 1,000 items
Scheduleâť1
â
â
Up to 2,500 items
ToDo
â
â
Up to 100 items
Received mailâť2âť3
â
â
Up to 2,500 items
Sent mailâť3
â
â
Up to 1,000 items
Draft mailâť3
â
â
Up to 20 items
Decome-Anime template
â
â
Up to 100 items
Text memo
â
â
Up to 20 items
Melodyâť4
â
â
Up to 3,500 items
Still image fileâť5âť6
â
â
Up to 3,500 items
i-motion fileâť7
â
â
Up to 3,500 items
PDF fileâť4âť8
â
â
Up to 3,500 items
ToruCa fileâť3âť4
â
â
Up to 495 items
Bookmarkâť3
â
â
Up to 600 items
LCS client information
â
â
Up to 5 items
The FOMA terminal conforms to IrMC⢠version 1.1 standard.
You can exchange data files with the devices supporting the infrared
communication function. However, you cannot exchange some files
depending on the other partyâs device.
Transferable data
The distance for infrared communication should be within about 20 cm. Do not move
the FOMA terminal with the infrared data port pointed to the receiving end until data
transfer ends.
Hold the FOMA terminal with your hands securely so that it does not move.
If you expose the FOMA terminal to direct sunlight or put it under fluorescent lights or
near an infrared equipment, you may not be able to transmit infrared ray normally due
to their influence.
First set at the receiving end and begin sending data from the sending end within 30
seconds.
During exchange, the FOMA terminal is placed in the same state as it is out of the
service area, so you cannot make/receive voice calls or videophone calls, use packet
communication such as i-mode or mail, or use data communication.
Within about 20 cm
Infrared data port
Within ¹15°
from the center
â: Can be transferred
â: Cannot be transferred
âť1 You cannot send/receive holidays, or i-schedule downloaded from i-concier.
âť2 You can send/receive up to 30 Area Mail messages separately. (2,530 messages in
total)
âť3 The folder-sort setting may not be reflected.
âť4 You cannot send/receive some files.
âť5 Includes Flash movies.
âť6 You cannot send/receive original animations and still images recorded by 1Seg.
âť7 You cannot send/receive ASF files and videos recorded by 1Seg.
âť8 The i-mode bookmarks may be deleted.
358
â Storage location and order of received files
Data
Storage location/Order
Phonebook receive one data The phone number is stored to the lowest empty memory
(Own
number in â010â through â999â in the Phonebook. If all
number)
memory numbers â010â through â999â are occupied, the
phone number is stored to the lowest empty memory
numbers in â000â through â009â (2-touch dial).
receive all data Stored in the same memory number as that of the sender.
Schedule
receive one data Stored with the starting date/time of the schedule event.
Data
receive all data Stored in the same folder as that of the sender in the
same order.
i-motion file receive one data/ Stored on the top in the âi-modeâ folder in âimotion/
receive multiple Movieâ inside âData boxâ.
data
receive all data Stored in the same folder as that of the sender in the
same order.
receive all data Stored with the same date and time as those of the
sender.
ToDo
receive one data Stored on the top in the ToDo list.
PDF file
receive all data Stored in the same order as that of the sender.
Received
mail
receive one data Stored in the âOutboxâ folder on the Outbox Folder list
with the same date and time as that of the sender.
receive all data Stored in the same folder as that of the sender with the
same date and time.
Draft mail
receive one data Stored with the same date and time as that of the sender.
receive all data Stored with the same date and time as that of the sender.
DecomeAnime
template
receive one data Stored in the âPhoneâ folder in âDecome-Animeâ in
âTemplateâ inside âMailâ.
receive all data Stored in the same order as that of the sending end.
Text memo receive one data Stored in the first .
receive all data Stored in the same order as that of the sender from the
top of the list.
Melody
receive one data Stored on the top in the âi-modeâ folder in âMelodyâ inside
âData boxâ.
receive all data Stored in the same folder as that of the sender in the
same order.
ToruCa file receive one data/ Stored on the top in the âToruCaâ folder.
receive multiple
data
receive all data Stored in the same folder as that of the sender in the
same order.
Bookmark
receive one data Stored on the top in the âBookmarkâ folder.
receive all data Stored in the same folder as that of the sender in the
same order.
LCS client receive one data Stored in the first .
information receive all data Stored in the same order as that of the sender from the
top of the list.
Information
You cannot send the following files:
ăťFiles whose output from the FOMA terminal is prohibited
ăťPartially saved files
ăťPhonebook entries and SMS messages on the UIM
You cannot send all the pre-installed data files in Data Box at a time.
You cannot send the files on the microSD card. Copy or move to the FOMA terminal
and then send.
359
Data Management
Sent mail
receive one data Stored on the top in the âi-modeâ folder in âMy documentsâ
inside âData boxâ.
receive all data Stored in the same folder as that of the sender in the
same order.
receive one data Stored in the âInboxâ folder on the Inbox Folder list with
the same date and time as that of the sender.
receive all data Stored in the same folder as that of the sender with the
same date and time.
Storage location/Order
Still Image receive one data/ Stored on the top in the âi-modeâ folder in âMy pictureâ
file
receive multiple inside âData boxâ.
data
Data Management
Information
You can send/receive up to 9 full-pitch/18 half-pitch characters for a title of a still
image, i-motion file, or PDF file, or up to 31 full-pitch/63 half-pitch characters for a title
of a melody.
When you send a mail message, the file attached to the mail message is also sent.
However some files cannot be sent depending on the file type.
Depending on the mobile phone at the receiving end, subjects of i-mode mail
messages cannot be received completely.
The mail message with an attached file which has not been obtained, or the mail
message containing the link information for starting an i-Îąppli program is sent after the
file or information is deleted.
When the received mail messages exceed the maximum number/size of storage,
they are deleted in order of mail in the âTrash boxâ folder and older received mail.
However, unread or protected mail messages are not deleted.
When the sent mail messages exceed the maximum number/size of storage, they are
deleted in order of older sent mail. However, protected mail messages are not
deleted.
When the Decome-Anime template contains a file whose output from the FOMA
terminal is prohibited, the mail message is sent after the file or text data is deleted.
When you send a ToruCa file (details) using infrared rays, the confirmation display
appears asking whether to forward the file including the detailed information. In this
case, select âYESâ to send it with the detailed information, or select âNOâ to send the
ToruCa file as a file before receiving the detailed information.
The ToruCa file (details) that contains data whose output from the FOMA terminal is
prohibited is sent as a ToruCa file before receiving the detailed information.
You cannot receive Phonebook entries while Restrict Dialing is activated. At sending,
you can send only the Phonebook entries set with Restrict Dialing and data of Own
Number.
It may take long to forward data or you might not be able to receive data depending on
the data size.
You cannot store a still image in excess of 3 Mbytes, i-motion file in excess of 10
Mbytes, melody in excess of 100 Kbytes, PDF file in excess of 2 Mbytes,
Decome-Anime template in excess of 100 Kbytes, ToruCa file in excess of 1 Kbyte, or
ToruCa file (details) in excess of 100 Kbytes.
If the FOMA USB Cable with Charge Function 01/02 (option) is connected to the
FOMA terminal, you may not be able to perform infrared communication.
You cannot send files that are not supported by the device at the receiving end.
360
Sending/Receiving One or Multiple Data
You can send/receive the data files one by one using infrared rays.
You can send/receive multiple still images, i-motion files, and ToruCa
files at a time.
â Notes on sending/receiving
In Secret Mode, you can send secret data as well. However, in Secret Data Only, you
can send only the secret data.
If you receive a Phonebook entry stored as secret data during Secret Mode or Secret
Data Only, the Phonebook entry is stored as an ordinary one.
When sending a Phonebook entry, you cannot send the stored secret code and voice
dial entry.
Send One or Multiple Data
Display of the data file to be senti(
Send Ir data
To send a Phonebook entry, select âSend Ir/
trans/BTâ â âSend Ir dataâ from
the Function menu and then select âSend phonebookâ.
To send a schedule event, select âIr/
transmissionâ â âSend Ir dataâ from the
Function menu and then select âSendâ.
To send a mail message, Decome-Anime template, ToruCa file or bookmark,
select âIr/
transmissionâ from the Function menu and then select âSend Ir
dataâ.
To send multiple files, select the files you want to send by âMultiple-choiceâ. Press
i(
) to select âSend Ir dataâ.
YES
To send multiple files, select âYESâ by a factor of selected number of files, and
send them.
Receive One or Multiple Data
mLifeKitReceive Ir data
+m-7-9
You can paste the Ir data receiving function to the desktop, or store it for Multi
Key Long Press Setting. (See page 30 and page 386)
2
ReceiveYES
The confirmation display appears asking whether to continue receiving after
receiving one data file. When you received multiple files, select âYESâ.
Information
Send All Data
Display of the data file to be senti(
Send all Ir dataEnter your Terminal Security Code.
To send the Phonebook entries, select âSend Ir/
trans/BTâ â âSend Ir dataâ
from the Function menu and then select âSend all phonebookâ.
To send schedule events from the Schedule list or detailed Schedule display,
select âIr/
transmissionâ â âSend Ir dataâ from the Function menu and then
select âSend allâ.
To send mail messages, Decome-Anime templates, ToruCa files or bookmarks,
and to send schedule events from Calendar display, select âIr/
transmissionâ
from the Function menu and then select âSend all Ir dataâ.
When you send data files in Data Box, the confirmation display appears telling
that the files you cannot send are contained. To proceed sending, select âYESâ.
When you receive an instruction for starting a software program, and you have
already downloaded a compatible software program, that software program starts. If
you have not put a check mark for âIr iÎąppli Toâ of âSet iÎąppli Toâ, the software
program does not start up automatically.
Sending/Receiving All Data
By using infrared rays, you can collectively send/receive data files.
To send all data files, enter a session number (any four-digit number).
The receiving end needs to enter the same session number.
Enter the session numberYES
Enter any four-digit number as the session number.
Receive All Data
mLifeKitReceive Ir data
+m-7-9
You can paste the Ir data receiving function to the desktop, or store it for Multi
Key Long Press Setting. (See page 30 and page 386)
Receive allEnter your Terminal Security Code
Enter the same session number as that entered at the
sending endYESYES
Information
When you receive Phonebook entries in which still images are stored or mail to which
files are attached, and the multiple same still images or files are found, only one image
or file is stored.
361
Data Management
â Notes on sending/receiving all data files
Receiving all data files at a time deletes and overwrites all the stored data files
including secret or protected data files. The data file you have stored in âSecret modeâ
is deleted as well. Check that no important data file is stored before receiving all data
files.
However, Decome-Anime templates, files in Data Box, and ToruCa files are
additionally stored without deleting the files at the receiving end.
If you send all Phonebook entries, the âOwn numberâ data is also sent. All the data of
âOwn numberâ at the receiving end is overwritten except the own number. Mail address
is also overwritten by senderâs address, so change it at the receiving end.
Even if you send all Phonebook entries, information of voice dial entries are not sent.
The Phonebook entries stored as secret data are sent not only during Secret Mode but
also any other time. The sent secret data is stored as secret data at the receiving end,
too.
The group names in the Phonebook you have received are stored, so the data set in
âGroup settingâ is also overwritten.
Note that the schedule events at the receiving end are all deleted if you send all ToDo
items to the phone that does not support ToDo.
You can send/receive the protected sent/received mail messages.
When any unsupported data file is included, receiving might be interrupted.
Using Infrared Remote Control Function
You can use the FOMA terminal as a TV remote control by starting the
i-Îąppli program.
To use remote control devices, you may need to download the software program for
those devices. [The pre-installed âGăŹă¤ăçŞçľčĄ¨ăŞă˘ăłăł (G Guide Program List
Remote control)â supports the infrared remote control function.] The key operation for
the remote control differs depending on the software program.
This function does not work with some devices.
Communication might be affected by compatible devices and the ambient light.
You cannot use the infrared remote control during Self Mode.
Data Management
Infrared Remote Control
iC Communication Function
iC communication is the function that enables you to send/receive data
files to/from another FOMA terminal using the FeliCa reader/writer
function. You can send/receive data files by facing the f mark of your
FOMA terminal toward that of another FOMA terminal supporting the iC
communication function. However, you cannot exchange some files
depending on the other partyâs FOMA terminal.
The type of files you can forward and
forwarding conditions are the same as those
for infrared communication. (See page 358)
However, you cannot send multiple files, all
Decome-Anime templates and all data files in
Data Box at a time.
You cannot execute iC communication while
Face one anotherâs
âIC card lockâ is activated.
f marks.
You might have difficulty in sending or
receiving files depending on the destination
FOMA terminal. In that case, move a f mark
close to or away from the other f mark or
move each side up, down, left, or right.
During communication, the FOMA terminal is placed in the same state as it is out of the
service area, so you cannot make/receive voice calls or videophone calls, use packet
communication such as i-mode or mail, or use data communication.
Turn the FOMA terminalâs Infrared data port to the
front of a device to be operated. You can operate
within about 4 meters away from the device.
The radiation angle of the infrared rays is within ¹15°
from the center.
Within about
4 meters
Within
¹15° from
the center
Infrared data
port
+m-2-6
Communication Setting
For when you forward Phonebook entries using infrared rays, iC
communication, microSD card, or DOCOMO keitai datalink, you can
specify whether to forward the stored still images together.
mPhonebookPhonebook settings
Forwarding imageON or OFF
Sending/Receiving One Data
You can send/receive the data files one by one using iC communication.
See ââ Notes on sending/receivingâ on page 360 as well.
Send One Data
You cannot use this function during charging.
Display of the data file to be senti(
transmission
To send a Phonebook entry, select âSend Ir/
trans/BTâ â â
transmissionâ
from the Function menu and then select âSend phonebookâ.
To send a schedule event, select âIr/
transmissionâ â â
transmissionâ from
the Function menu and then select âSendâ.
To send a mail message, Decome-Anime template, ToruCa file or bookmark, select
âIr/
transmissionâ from the Function menu and then select â
transmissionâ.
362
2
YES
Receive All Data
You cannot use this function during Multitask.
Receive One Data
You cannot use this function during Multitask.
Face the f mark of the FOMA terminal of the receiving
end while the Stand-by display is shown to that of the
FOMA terminal of the sending endYES
Sending/Receiving All Data
YESEnter your Terminal Security Code
Enter the same session number as that entered at the
sending end.
When you receive Phonebook entries in which still images are stored, and the
multiple same still images are found, only one image is stored.
Using Voice Recorder
This function is for recording voices. You can record voices in a meeting
instead of taking notes.
Send All Data
You cannot use this function during charging.
To send the Phonebook entries, select âSend Ir/
trans/BTâ â
â
transmissionâ from the Function menu and then select âSend all phonebookâ.
To send schedule events from the Schedule list or the detailed Schedule display,
select âIr/
transmissionâ â â
transmissionâ from the Function menu and
then select âSend allâ.
To send schedule events from the Calendar display or send mail messages,
ToruCa files or bookmarks, select âIr/
transmissionâ from the Function menu
and then select âAll
transmissionâ.
This function is the same as the one for when âMovie type setâ is set to âVoiceâ in Movie
Mode.
You can play back the saved voice from âimotion/Movieâ of âData boxâ.
See page 506 for the estimate of recordable time.
mLifeKitVoice recorder
Enter the session numberYES
Enter any four-digit number as the session number.
Voice Recorder
Recording display
363
Data Management
See ââ Notes on sending/receiving all data filesâ on page 361 as well.
Face the f mark of the FOMA terminal of the receiving
end while the Stand-by display is shown to that of the
FOMA terminal of the sending end.
Information
By using iC communication, you can collectively send/receive
Phonebook entries, schedule events, ToDo items, text memos,
bookmarks, mail messages, ToruCa files, and LCS client information.
To send all data files, enter a session number (any four-digit number).
The receiving end needs to enter the same session number.
Display of the data file to be senti(
All
transmission
Enter your Terminal Security Code.
2
Press Oo(
) or 0.
Attach to mail
) or 0.
You can save the recorded voice and attach it to i-mode mail.
Go to step 2 on page 130.
You can compose it also by pressing l(
).
Store in
See page 364.
File restriction
See page 225.
Cancel
You do not save the recorded voice.
Recording starts.
Press Oo(
Recording ends. The Voice Recorder Saving Pre-check display appears.
Press m(
) to play back the recorded voice.
Press Oo(
) or 0.
Function Menu of the Voice Recorder Recording display
Data Management
File size setting
Select an item.
Mail restrictân(S) . . . . . You can record up to 500 Kbytes.
Mail restrictân(L) . . . . . You can record up to 2 Mbytes.
Long time . . . . . . . . . . . You can record for a long time. The
voice is saved to the microSD card.
Storage setting
Store in
You can set the storage location for the recorded voice.
When you set to âPhoneâ, the voice is saved to âVoice
recorderâ in the âimotion/Movieâ folder. When you set to
âmicroSDâ, it is saved to the folder in âOther contentsâ which
you set for âSelect storageâ.
Phone or microSD
Auto save set
You can set whether to automatically save the recorded voice
after you finish recording.
ON or OFF
File restriction
See page 225.
Memory info
You can display the used memory space (estimate)/number of
stored items.
Function Menu of the Voice Recorder Saving Pre-check
display
Play
See page 364.
Save
See page 364.
364
Displaying PDF Data
You can display the stored PDF files.
mData boxMy documentsSelect a folder
Select a PDF file.
Each time you press m
from the Folder list, you can
switch between the folders
in the FOMA terminal and
the microSD card.
You cannot display the
Folder list
PDF File list
PDF files in the âMovable
contentsâ folder.
See page 356 for the Function menu of the Folder list.
The following images are displayed when you cannot display a preview image.
Cannot be
displayed
Does not support
(PDF file displayed
as â
â or â
â)
See page 193 when the PDF file is set with a password.
Does not support
(PDF file displayed
as â
â)
â Operations when displaying a PDF file
See page 365 for when you operate from the Function menu.
Operation
Key operation
Operation
Key operation
Copy to microSD
See page 348.
Copy to phone
See page 349.
Move to microSD
See page 350.
Zo
Next page
c, 9, >
Move to phone
See page 350.
Lower scroll
Xo
Previous page
m, 7, <
Copy
See page 320.
Left scroll
Co
Search
Move
See page 321.
Right scroll
Vo
Search next
Add desktop icon
See page 30.
Call up the key
operation guide
Search previous
Delete this
See page 321.
Call up the bookmark
list
Delete all
See page 321.
Multiple-choice
See page 321.
Memory info
You can display the used memory space (estimate)/number of
stored items.
Sort
See page 321.
Listing
You can change the displayed contents on the PDF File list.
Title or Image
You can switch the contents also by pressing c(
).
Zoom in
Zoom out
Fit page
Add bookmark
(for at least one
second)
Information
When many files are stored in the FOMA terminal or the microSD card, it may take
long to access them. It may take long to display the PDF file depending on the PDF
file.
Some files might not be correctly displayed.
When you try to display undownloaded pages while the PDF file partially downloaded
is displayed, downloading of the page starts.
Information
When you use âImageâ to display PDF files, they might appear different from the
actual images depending on the PDF files.
Function Menu of the PDF File List
Function Menu while PDF File is Displayed
Edit title
See page 319.
Document info
You can display the PDF file name, saved date/time, etc.
Attach to mail
You can compose an i-mode mail message with the PDF files
attached.
Go to step 2 on page 130.
You can compose it also by pressing l(
).
Send Ir data
See page 360.
Send all Ir data
See page 361.
transmission
See page 362.
Zoom in
You can zoom in the PDF file.
You can zoom in the PDF file up to 1,000%.
Zoom out
You can zoom out the PDF file.
You can zoom out the PDF file up to 8%.
Go to
You can move to another page of the PDF file.
Select the page you want to move to.
If you select âSpecified pageâ, enter the page number you
want to move to in the page number field, and select âOKâ;
then you can access to the specified page.
365
Data Management
Upper scroll
Search
You can display the screen in which the specified character
string is contained. The point that matches the specified
character is marked in yellow green.
SearchSelect the search string field
Enter a character string to be searched for.
You can enter up to 8 full-pitch/16 half-pitch characters.
Page layout
At Viewer
start-up
Single page
Display link
You can display links set in the PDF file. Internal links (links
set in the PDF file displayed), Web To, Mail To, and Phone
To/AV Phone To are available for the links.
Select a link.
When multiple links are found in the display, you can select
a link by pressing Bo.
When you select an internal link, you can move to the linked
page in the PDF file. See page 195 for another link.
Page info ON/OFF
You can set whether to display the zoom magnification, page
number, and scroll bar for displaying the PDF file.
Select an itemDisplay or Not display
Put a check mark for search conditions to be specified
l(
If you select âSearch prev.â or âSearch nextâ, you can
continue to search under the same condition.
Data Management
Bookmark/mark
Disp. bookmark
See page 367.
Add bookmark
You can set a bookmark (i-mode bookmark) for the page
currently displayed and can display the desired page easily by
selecting the bookmark. You can set up to 10 bookmarks.
YESSelect the title fieldEnter a titleOK
You can enter up to 64 full-pitch/128 half-pitch characters.
See page 368 when bookmarks are stored to the maximum.
You can change the display layout of the PDF file.
Single page, Continuous or Continuous-facing
At Viewer
start-up
Display
Document info
See page 365.
Display mark
See page 367.
Save
See page 367.
Add mark
You can store the currently displayed page number and the
position within the page as the mark. You can use the stored
mark as the sign of the reference point. You can set up to 10
marks.
YES
See page 368 when marks are stored to the maximum.
Download remain
You can download all pages of the PDF file which you have
not completely downloaded yet such as partially downloaded
page by page or failed to be downloaded owing to
disconnection of communication midway.
YES
Capture screen
You can cut out a part of the display and save it as JPEG
image.
Oo(
)YESSelect a folder.
See page 194 when images are stored to the maximum.
Attach to mail
You can compose an i-mode mail message with the PDF files
attached.
Go to step 2 on page 130.
View types
View mode
Rotate view
366
You can change display format of the PDF file.
Select a display format.
If you select âUser definedâ, enter the magnification value in
the magnification specification field, and select âOKâ; then
you can display the page at the specified magnification.
The magnification you can specify is 8 through 1,000%.
If you save a file after changing the display format, it is
displayed at the saved magnification next time.
90° to right or 90° to left
Delete all
Information
The search conditions work as shown below:
Match case: Identifies between uppercase and lowercase for search.
Whole words only: Searches for character strings that completely match by unit of a
word.
Search upward: When you do âSearch nextâ, you can search backwards to the first
page from the start page.
Search â?â as wildcard: â?â mark (half-pitch) entered in the search string field is set for
a search condition as a random character.
Search in this page: Searches in the currently displayed page only.
You cannot change the layout of the partial PDF file.
You might not be able to cut out the display depending on the security setting of the
PDF file.
While a PDF file is displayedi(
Bookmark/markDisp. bookmark
Bookmark or i-mode bookmarkSelect a bookmark.
Some bookmarks that have been set beforehand are categorized into tier-levels.
Press i(
) to display the bookmarks at the lower level. However, all the
bookmarks at the third-tier level or lower are displayed at the third-tier level.
Display Mark
You can list the marked pages and positions stored in the PDF file.
When you select a mark, you can display the page in which the mark is
stored.
Function Menu while the Mark List is Displayed
Delete
YES
Delete selected
Put a check mark for marks to be deletedl(
YES
Delete all
Enter your Terminal Security CodeYES
Save
Delete
YES
Delete selected
Put a check mark for bookmarks to be deleted
l(
)YES
While a PDF file is displayedi(
YES
)Save
The PDF file once saved to the FOMA terminal or microSD card is overwritten each
time you save it. (The operation in step 2 is not required.)
The PDF file that is not saved to the FOMA terminal or microSD card is newly
saved.
With the PDF file that was re-downloaded from the first page owing to updating at
the serverâs end, the confirmation display appears asking whether to overwrite
the current data. Select âYESâ to overwrite it. Select âNOâ to newly save.
Enter a title.
You can enter up to 64 full-pitch/128 half-pitch characters.
Delete
You can save the PDF files. You can save the newly downloaded pages
and added bookmarks/marks.
You can save up to 3,500 files in total sharing the memory space with
other data files, however, the number of files you can save decreases
depending on the data volume. (See page 508)
Function Menu while the i-mode Bookmark List is Displayed
Edit title
While a PDF file is displayedi(
Bookmark/markDisplay markSelect a mark.
Select a destination folder.
See page 194 when PDF files in the FOMA terminal are stored to the maximum.
367
Data Management
Display Bookmark
You can list the bookmarks set for the PDF file and the i-mode
bookmarks additionally set.
By selecting a bookmark, you can display the page for which the
bookmark is set.
Enter your Terminal Security CodeYES
When bookmarks or marks are set to the maximum
If you try to add a bookmark or mark to the PDF file for which 10 bookmarks or marks
have been set, or if you try to save the PDF file for which 11 or more bookmarks or marks
have been set, the confirmation display appears asking whether to add/save the
bookmark or mark after unnecessary ones are deleted.
1. YES
2. Select bookmarks/marks to be deletedYES
or
Put a check mark for bookmarks/marks to be deletedl(
)YES
Continue putting a check mark until â
â appears.
Data Management
Displaying Word, Excel, and PowerPoint
Files
You can display the Microsoft Word, Microsoft Excel and Microsoft
PowerPoint files saved to the microSD card. (See page 354)
â Type of displayable documents
Type of document
XLS
Word
DOC
PowerPoint
PPT
mData boxDocument viewerSelect a folder
Select a file.
See page 356 for the
Function menu of the
Folder list.
Folder list
368
Operation
Key operation
Operation
Key operation
Upper scroll
Zo
Zoom out
Lower scroll
Xo
Fit page
Left scroll
Co
Next page
c, 9, >
Right scroll
m, 7, <
Vo
Previous page
Call up the key
operation guide
Search
Search next
Zoom in
Search previous
Information
The files of Word 2007, Excel 2007, and PowerPoint 2007 are not supported.
Some files might not be correctly displayed.
Function Menu of the Document List
Extension
Excel
â Operations when displaying a document file
See page 368 for when you operate from the Function menu.
Document list
Edit title
See page 319.
File info
You can display the name and type of files.
Attach to mail
You can compose an i-mode mail message with the document
file attached.
Go to step 2 on page 130.
You can compose it also by pressing l(
).
Copy
See page 320.
Move
See page 321.
Delete this
See page 321.
Delete all
See page 321.
Multiple-choice
See page 321.
Memory info
You can display the used memory space (estimate).
Function Menu while Document File is Displayed
Zoom in
You can zoom in the file.
You can zoom in the file up to 1,000%.
Zoom out
You can zoom out the file.
You can zoom out the file up to 8%.
View types
You can change display format of the file.
Select a display format.
If you select âUser definedâ, enter the magnification value in the
magnification specification field; then you can display the page
at the specified magnification.
The magnification you can specify by âUser definedâ is 8
through 1,000%.
You can move to another page or sheet of the file.
Select the page or the sheet you want to move to.
If you select âSpecified pageâ for the Microsoft Word file or
Microsoft PowerPoint file, enter the page number you want to
move to in the page number field; then you can move to the
specified page.
Search
You can display the screen in which the specified character string
is contained. The point that matches the specified character string
is highlighted.
SearchSelect the search string field
Enter a character string to be searched for.
You can enter up to 8 full-pitch/16 half-pitch characters.
Put a check mark for search conditions to be specified
l(
If you select âSearch prev.â or âSearch nextâ, you can continue
to search under the same condition.
Zoom & page
You can set whether to display the zoom magnification and page
number for displaying the file.
Display or Not display
Scroll bar
You can set whether to display the scroll bar for displaying the file.
Display or Not display
Rotate view
90° to right or 90° to left
Document info
You can display the name and type of files.
Printing Saved Images
Select a Method to Print the Images Saved in the
microSD Card
DPOF is the format for recording the print information about the still
image you shot with a digital camera. You can input the information into
the still image on the microSD card about whether to print it out and how
many copies you print out. You can take the card to DPE service shops
or use a DPOF compatible printer to print photos as you specify.
Still image in play/Still image listi(
DPOF settingPrint
Enter the number of copies to be printed out.
Enter â01â through â99â in two digits.
To cancel printing the selected still image, select âPrint OFFâ. To cancel printing
all still images, select âAll print OFFâ.
Information
The classification icon of the images set with DPOF Setting is â
â.
You can set DPOF Setting for up to 999 image files.
You cannot set DPOF Setting for the image in excess of 3 Mbytes or 8M (2448 x
3264).
If unused space on the microSD card is not enough, DPOF Setting might not be set.
(The icon and Picture Information, however, indicate DPOF is set.)
Still images shot by P-09A also support PRINT Image Matchingâ
˘.
369
Data Management
Go to
Information
The search conditions work as shown below:
Whole words only: Searches for character strings that completely match by unit of a
word.
Match case: Identifies between uppercase and lowercase for search.
Search in this page (Excel file only): Searches in the currently displayed page only.
Search in this file (Excel file only): Searches in the whole file.
370
Convenient Functions
Multiaccess . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Multitask . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Informing You of an Incoming Call/Mail Message by Voice
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Turning Power On/Off Automatically at a Specified Time
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Using Alarm. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Using Calendar to Manage Schedule . . . . . . . . . . .
Using ToDo to Manage Schedule . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Setting Operating Conditions of Alarm . . . . .
Using Your Original Menu . . . . . . . . . .
Storing Frequently Used Function for Multi Key
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Storing Your Name, Mail Address and Other Information
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Recording Voice during a Call or Standby as Voice Memo
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Recording Images during a Videophone Call as a Movie Memo
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
372
373
374
376
376
379
384
385
385
386
387
388
388
Checking Call Duration/Charge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 389
Resetting Total Duration/Total Cost
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 389
Setting Call Cost Limit. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 390
Using Calculator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 390
Making Text Memos . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 390
Copying/Deleting Data Items between FOMA Terminal and UIM
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 391
How to Use Earphone/Microphone with Switch
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 392
Selecting a Microphone for Use when an Earphone is Connected
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 393
Selecting Other Party to Call for when an Earphone is Connected
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 394
Receiving a Call Automatically when an Earphone is Connected
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 394
Using Bluetooth Function . . . . . . . . . . . 395
Checking the Setting of Various Functions
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 402
371
Receive a Voice Call during i-mode or during Packet
Communication
Multiaccess
Multiaccess enables you to simultaneously connect to three lines; a
voice call, packet communication, and SMS.
To switch the displays, press and hold x for at least one second; or
press x to switch from TASK MENU. (See page 374)
See page 478 for details on combination of Multiaccess.
Voice call
Single line
i-mode, i-Îąppli, i-mode mail, packet communication via PC
Single line
SMS
Single line
You can receive a voice call without disconnecting i-mode or packet
communication.
The Call Receiving display appears when a call comes in
Press d to answer the call.
To return to the display for i-mode or packet communication without answering
the call, press and hold x for at least one second. Press and hold x for at
least one second again to return to the Call Receiving display.
The caller hears not a message but a ringback tone.
Use Communication during Voice Call
Convenient Functions
Information
You are charged a fee for each line during Multiaccess.
You can use i-mode, send/receive i-mode mail, etc. without
disconnecting a voice call.
Make a Voice Call during i-mode or during Packet
Communication
You can make a voice call without disconnecting i-mode or packet
communication.
During i-mode or packet communicationx
Stand-by display
Make a call.
If you make a videophone call during i-mode, i-mode is disconnected and the
videophone call is made.
After you finish the videophone call, the i-mode display returns.
372
During a voice callxm(
Select an icon to operate each function.
Information
When a mail message or Message R/F comes in during a call, the ring tone does not
sound and incoming illumination does not flicker regardless of the âReceiving displayâ
setting.
A ring tone sounds and the Receiving Result display appears when âReceiving
displayâ is set to âAlarm preferredâ except for the following cases:
シDuring a call
シWhile the camera is activated
シWhile you are watching a 1Seg program (when âMail ticker displayâ is set to other
than âOFFâ)
シWhen an i-ιppli program set for the Stand-by display is running as an ordinary
i-Îąppli program
When you perform packet communication via a personal computer, make a call-out
operation from the personal computer during a voice call.
Multitask
The FOMA terminal supports âMultitaskâ that enables you to use up to
three functions such as menu functions (see page 32) at the same time.
By combining Multiaccess and Multitask, you can use following
functions simultaneously (see page 479 for the combination patterns of
Multitask):
Mail group
Start Another Function
When a function is runningx
m(
Start another function.
For the icon of the group in use, â
â or another mark is
added.
When a single function is used, â
â is displayed.
When multiple functions are used, â
â is displayed.
i-mode group
Setting group
When a function in the
Tool group is running
Tool group
The confirmation display appears asking whether to switch the functions. Select âYESâ to
close the current menu function and the new menu function will be called up.
Information
â Mail group
i-mode mail and SMS functions
â i-mode group
Menu functions of âi-mode groupâ on Main Menu
â Setting group
Menu functions of âSetting groupâ on Main Menu
You are charged a call fee even when you are running other functions during a call.
If a call comes in while another function is working, the call might not be received
correctly. In that case, âRecord messageâ or âCall Forwarding Serviceâ may start in a
shorter time than the ring time specified for them.
If you use Multitask to switch functions while executing another function whose load of
processing is high, delay may occur in displaying operation, and so on.
â Tool group
Menu functions of âTool groupâ on Main Menu
â Other functions which do not belong to the groups
Voice call, videophone call, 64K data communication, etc.
373
Convenient Functions
If another menu function in the same group has already been
called up
Switch Displays
When multiple menu functions are working, you can switch the displays
by pressing and holding x for at least one second. The display
switches from the latest one in chronological order.
To display the menu list for functions in use
Press x.
You can switch displays by selecting a function from the list.
Press c(
) or select âStand-by displayâ to show the
Stand-by display.
Press m(
) or select âOpen Menuâ to show Main
Menu.
Convenient Functions
Information
Even if you press -x to switch the displays, neither menu function in use is closed
nor the call is disconnected. Also, even when you switch the Character Entry (Edit)
display to another menu and use that menu for editing text, you can continue editing
the previous text if you switch tasks.
When you press and hold -x for at least one second from the Stand-by display while
any function is not working, the function you stored for Multi Key Long Press Setting
starts.
Exit a Function
To close a menu function, press h with the menu function displayed.
Press i(
) from TASK MENU, and select âYESâ to close all menu functions
and to return to the Stand-by display.
When you press h from the Stand-by display during Play Background, the
confirmation display appears asking whether to end the menu function.
374
Informing You of an Incoming Call/Mail
Message by Voice
You can set to be notified of incoming calls by voice instead of a ring
tone, or to have the mail contents automatically read aloud. Further, the
voice guidance tells you how to operate Voice Dial. This function is
available in Japanese only.
Read Aloud Settings
mSet./ServiceOther settingsVoice settings
Read aloud settingsON or OFFPut a check mark
for items to be read aloudl(
Voice dial . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Instructs you through the Voice Dial operation by
voice guidance.
Incoming call . . . . . . . . . . . . Notifies you of the caller information by voice while a
voice call is coming in.
Videophone incoming . . . . Notifies you of the caller information by voice while a
videophone call is coming in.
Number of mails/msgs. . . . Notifies you of the number of mail messages/
Messages R/F by voice at reception.
The setting of âMail/Msg. ring timeâ is invalid.
Mail list . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Reads aloud the sender/destination address and
subject on the Inbox/Outbox list.
Displaying mail . . . . . . . . . . Reads aloud the sender/destination address,
subject, and text on the detailed mail display.
However, the voice guidance is not provided when a
melody is automatically played back while
âAuto-start attachmentâ is set to âONâ.
Does not read aloud the text on the Decome-Anime
Playback display.
Send mail preview. . . . . . . . Reads aloud the destination address and text when
previewed.
You can stop the voice guidance for a mail message midway by pressing any
key. However, it continues if you scroll the display.
The voice guidance for a mail message is not provided in the following cases:
シ While the audio from a 1Seg program is played back
シ When a mail message in Multiwindow is displayed
シ When a mail message stored on the microSD card is displayed
Read Aloud Volume
mSet./ServiceOther settingsVoice settings
Read aloud volumeUse Boto adjust the volume.
Read Aloud Speed
mSet./ServiceOther settingsVoice settings
Read aloud speedSelect a speed.
Read Aloud Valid Setting
You can set the voice guidance to be provided only when an earphone/
microphone (option) is connected.
mSet./ServiceOther settingsVoice settings
Read aloud valid set.Normal or Earphone
Normal. . . . . .Always provides the voice guidance.
Earphone. . . .Provides the voice guidance only when an earphone/microphone is
connected.
Information
Read Aloud Output
You can set whether to play back the voice guidance from the speaker or
hear it from the earpiece.
mSet./ServiceOther settingsVoice settings
Read aloud outputSpeaker or Earpiece
Information
The voice guidance of âIncoming callâ, âVideophone incomingâ and âNumber of mails/
msgs.â is output from the speaker even when this function is set to âEarpieceâ.
When an earphone/microphone (option) is connected, the voice guidance is output
according to the setting of âHeadset usage settingâ. However, when âRead aloud
outputâ is set to âEarpieceâ and âHeadset usage settingâ is set to âHeadset and
speakerâ, the voice guidance is output from the earphone except for âIncoming callâ,
âVideophone incomingâ and âNumber of mails/msgs.â.
From a Hands-free device, the voice guidance for âIncoming callâ and âVideophone
incomingâ only might be provided.
You might not be able to stop the voice guidance even by pressing the switch of the
earphone/microphone (option).
Rules of Voice Guidance
The contents of mail messages and others are read aloud generally according to the
rules below:
They may not be read aloud as specified in the following rules depending on the
function you use:
A numeric string up to 16 digits is read aloud as a number. When a numeric string
begins with â0â or it is identified as a URL or mail address, it is read aloud digit by digit.
When numerals are separated by â/â or â.â, they are read aloud as dates.
â1ćĽâ is differently read aloud for the meaning of the date (1st date of a month) and for others.
The kanji characters of dates other than â1ćĽâ are always read aloud as for the dates.
When numerals are separated by â:â, they are read aloud as time.
â-â, â(â and â)â contained in a phone number or zip code are not read aloud, and
numbers only are read aloud.
When a numeric string begins with ââ, âďźâ, âďż â, or â¥â, it is read aloud as the meaning of
money amount. When â,â is used, the numeric string before â,â is identified as money amount
and that after â,â is identified as a number, unless it is separated by every three digits.
â(Numeral) ĺ㎠(numeral)â is read as a fraction.
Alphabetical letters are read aloud according to the voice guidance dictionary
pre-installed in the FOMA terminal.
When a word consists of four or more letters and can be read in romaji-reading, it is
read aloud in romaji-reading.
The alphabetical letters after a numeral might be read aloud as a unit.
âMâ, âTâ, âSâ, and âHâ before a date are converted to the Japanese era name and then
read aloud.
Alphabetical letters other than above are read aloud in alphabetical reading.
375
Convenient Functions
When you set to âEarphoneâ, the voice guidance continues even if you remove the
earphone/microphone during the voice guidance. When a call comes in while the
earphone/microphone is removed, the voice guidance does not start even if you
connect it.
Convenient Functions
Symbols are read aloud according to the Symbol list. When the same symbol
continues three times or more, that symbol is not read aloud.
âăăłăˇăłâ is read aloud for the following character strings:
âRe:â, âRe>â, âRe2:â, âRe2>â and âRe2ďźâ
âăăłă˝ăź â is read aloud for the following character strings:
âFw:â, âFw>â, âFw2:â, âFw2>â, âFw2ďźâ, âFwd:â, âFwd>â, âFwd2:â, âFwd2>â and âFwd2ďźâ
When symbols for âReplyâ or âForwardâ are consecutively repeated, they are read
aloud only once.
Pictograms are read aloud according to the Pictogram list.
Smileys are read aloud according to the voice guidance dictionary pre-installed in the
FOMA terminal. When they are identified as a URL or mail address, however, they are
read aloud as symbols.
Texts are read aloud separated by punctuation marks and symbols such as â!â, or â?â.
When the kanji character that expresses the day of the week is put between â(â and â)â,
it is read aloud as the day of the week.
Words might not be correctly read aloud depending on the context of the text
(especially place names and proper nouns).
Information
When you set âAuto power OFFâ to the same time of an alarm, schedule alarm, or
others, those alarms preferentially work.
Even when you set âAuto power OFFâ, the power does not turn off at the specified
time if other than the Stand-by display is displayed. The power turns off after the
function in working is finished. When you set a Flash movie as the Stand-by display,
the power might not be turned off while the Flash movie is moving.
Turn off the FOMA terminal after setting âAuto power ONâ to âOFFâ when you are near
electronic devices using high-precision control or weak signals, or where the use is
prohibited such as in airplanes and hospitals.
+m-4-4
Using Alarm
You can set Alarm to alert you at the specified time with an alarm tone,
animation and illumination. You can store up to 12 alarms.
mStationeryAlarmHighlight an
alarm and press l(
Do the following operations.
Turning Power On/Off Automatically at a
Specified Time
mSet./ServiceClockAuto power ON/OFF
Auto power ON or Auto power OFFSelect an item.
Alarm
You can set whether to validate or invalidate the alarm.
ON or OFF
Time
OFF . . . . . . Does not set Auto Power ON/OFF. The setting is completed.
1 time . . . . Sets to turn on/off the power automatically at the specified time only
once.
Daily . . . . . Sets to turn on/off the power automatically at a specified time everyday
repeatedly.
Enter the time for sounding the alarm.
You cannot set the same time as the time set for the stored
alarm.
Repeat
Select a type of repeat.
If you select âSelect dayâ, put a check mark for days of the week
to be set and press l(
).
Enter a time.
Tone
Select a type of alarm toneSelect a folder
Select an alarm tone.
Information
When you set âAuto power ONâ and âAuto power OFFâ to the same time, and the
specified time arrives, the FOMA terminal will turn on if it is turned off, and the FOMA
terminal will turn off, if it is turned on.
376
Volume
Snooze
Use Bo to adjust the volume.
If you set âStepâ, the alarm tone is silent for about three
seconds, and then the volume steps up every about three
seconds, from Level 1 through Level 6.
You can set whether to activate Snooze. If you set to âOFFâ, set
the duration that the alarm tone is to continue sounding.
ON or OFFEnter a ring time (minutes).
You can enter from â01â through â10â in two digits.
See page 378 for how Snooze works.
Auto power ON You can set whether to turn on the power automatically to make
an alarm sound when the alarm time arrives during power off.
ON or OFF
Prefer manner
mode
Press l(
).
The following icons appear on the display depending on the setting:
: Repeats daily.
: Repeats on the specified day of the week.
Go to step 1 of âUsing Alarmâ on page 376.
Detail
You can display the stored alarm contents.
Set this
You can validate the stored alarm.
YES
You can validate also by pressing Oo(
Set all
You can validate all the stored alarm.
YES
Release all
You can invalidate all the stored alarm.
YES
).
Information
If the alarm tone sounds during a call, press any key to stop it. Once again press any
key to end the alarm including Snooze. If the other party on the phone hangs up, an
alarm including Snooze ends.
During a call, the alarm tone sounds at the level set for âVolumeâ (earpiece volume).
If any of the following events occurs in Snooze state, Snooze is released:
シWhen you receive a voice call or videophone call
シWhen you receive a mail message or Message R/F while âReceiving displayâ is set
to âAlarm preferredâ
シWhen you receive a location provision request while âLocation request set.â or the
setting by service is set to the settings that permits location provision
シWhen an alarm of âScheduleâ, âToDoâ, âTV timerâ or âTimer recordingâ sounds
Turn off the FOMA terminal after setting âAuto power ONâ to âOFFâ when you are near
electronic devices using high-precision control or weak signals, or where the use is
prohibited such as in airplanes and hospitals.
When you set an alarm for âAlarmâ, âScheduleâ, and âToDoâ
The icon appears on the Stand-by display.
â
Function Menu while Alarm is Displayed
Edit
You can invalidate the stored alarm.
YES
You can invalidate also by pressing Oo(
â. . . . . Displayed when an alarm is set for today (except the setting for past time).
â
â. . . . . Displayed when an alarm is set for tomorrow or onward only.
If you set âAlarmâ of a schedule event/ToDo item to âOFFâ, the icon is not displayed.
).
377
Convenient Functions
You can set the alarm tone which sounds at the specified time
during Manner Mode.
ON or OFF
ON . . . . . Sounds at the same volume as set for âAlarm volumeâ
on page 97.
OFF . . . . Sounds at the volume set for this function.
Release this
Convenient Functions
When the time specified for âAlarmâ, âScheduleâ or âToDoâ
comes
The alarm sounds for about five minutes (in the case of âAlarmâ, the alarm sounds for
specified time), and illumination lights. The vibrator works as you set for âPhoneâ of
âVibratorâ. The alarm message and an animation or i-motion file linking to the selected
icon is played back on the display.
If you set âSnoozeâ of âAlarmâ to âONâ
The alarm sounds for about one minute at an interval of five minutes, up to six times,
until Snooze is released by pressing h.
During a call
The alarm sounds from the earpiece three times repeatedly.
During operations
The FOMA terminal works according to the setting of âAlarm settingâ. (See page 385)
When you set an alarm to the time of another alarm
The alarm sounds in the priority order of âAlarmâââTimer recordingâââToDoââ
âScheduleâââTV timerâ.
When the power is turned off
When âAuto power ONâ is set to âONâ, the power automatically turns on to make an
alarm notification sound. When the auto-power setting is set to âOFFâ, an alarm does
not sound with the power stayed off. Even after turning the power on, the âMissed
alarmâ icon is not displayed.
The alarm does not sound.
The âMissed alarmâ icon is not displayed even after turning the power on.
In Manner Mode
The vibrator and illumination light notify you. For Schedule/ToDo, a message is also
displayed. The alarm sounds at the volume set for Manner Mode. (See page 97)
During Lock All, Personal Data Lock or Omakase Lock
The alarm does not sound.
If the power is turned off, the power does not turn on and the âMissed alarmâ icon does
not appear even after releasing each lock.
However, when you set âAlarmâ, âSchedule alarmâ, or âToDo alarmâ to âAcceptâ for
âCustomizeâ of Personal Data Lock, the alarm sounds even during Personal Data
Lock.
378
While operating the microSD card, during infrared communication, during iC
communication, or while updating software program
The alarm does not sound.
Information
If you set âAlarm settingâ to âAlarm preferredâ and the alarm time has come when you
are dialing, the alarm sounds after calling up the other party. If the alarm time has
come when receiving a call, the alarm sounds after starting communication.
You might not be able to set some i-motion files or Chaku-uta FullÂŽ music files for the
alarm.
Some i-motion files set for the alarm might be played back only with sound at the
specified time.
The Chaku-uta FullÂŽ music file set for the alarm is played back only with sound at the
specified time.
The illumination for when you play back a demo to select an alarm tone might differ
from for when you are notified by an alarm.
To clear alarm tone/alarm message, and animation/i-motion
file from the display
Press any key to stop the alarm tone but the animation/i-motion file changes to a still
image and the alarm message remains displayed. Press any key again (press h if you
set âSnoozeâ of âAlarmâ to âONâ) to clear the display. However, you cannot clear the
alarm message for the schedule event or ToDo item by pressing a side key when the
FOMA terminal is closed. When a call comes in, the alarm stops sounding.
When multiple schedule alarm messages exist, you can switch displays by pressing
i(
) or l(
) after stopping the alarm tone.
When âAlarmâ did not work
âMissed alarmâ icon may appear on the desktop. You can check that icon for the
contents of the missed alarm (Missed alarm information).
The latest missed alarm information that could not be notified is displayed.
+m-4-5
Repeat
Using Calendar to Manage Schedule
Set repeat time.
Unrestricted or XX timesEnter the repeat time.
Enter two digits from â02â through â99â.
The item set with repetition is counted as one item.
You can display the calendar by month to check the stored schedule
events.
You can display or store from January 1, 2000 through December 31,
2037.
See page 378 for how alarm works.
Alarm
Store Schedule Events
When the specified date/time comes, an alarm tone, illumination, subject
of the schedule event and animation corresponding to the set icon notify
you of the schedule event.
You can store up to 2,500 schedule events including i-schedule.
mStationerySchedulei(
Do the following operations.
Subject
Enter the date and time to be alerted.
)New
Select an icon.
When the alarm tone alerts you, the animation corresponding to
the selected icon is displayed.
Enter a subject.
You can enter up to 25 full-pitch/50 half-pitch characters.
The subject corresponding to the selected icon is entered in
advance.
Place
Enter a place.
You can enter up to 25 full-pitch/50 half-pitch characters.
All day
You can set the schedule event as âAll dayâ without entering
starting and ending date/time.
OFF or ON
When you set to âONâ, the start date/time is set to â0:00â and the
end date/time is set to â23:59â automatically.
Date (from)
Enter the date and time for starting the schedule.
Date (to)
Enter the date and time for ending the schedule.
Select an alarm method.
ON . . . . . . . . . . . Alerts you at the time of the starting date/time of
the schedule event. The setting for alarm
notification is completed.
ON/Set time . . . Alerts you at the time set as the prenotification.
OFF . . . . . . . . . . Does not alert. The setting for alarm notification
is completed.
Tone
Select a type of alarm toneSelect a folder
Select an alarm tone.
Details
Enter details.
You can enter up to 300 full-pitch/600 half-pitch characters.
Press l(
).
Information
If you enter a date on or after 29th in âDate (from)â and set âRepeatâ to âMonthlyâ or
âYearlyâ, the last day of the month is set for the schedule event when the month does
not have the specified date.
For the schedule event stored as secret data, an alarm message is not displayed
when the alarm sounds in ordinary mode (other than âSecret modeâ and âSecret data
onlyâ). An animation for secret data appears.
During standby, the alarm tone sounds at the level set for âPhoneâ of âRing volumeâ.
During a call, the alarm tone sounds at the level set for âVolumeâ (earpiece volume).
379
Convenient Functions
Select a type of repeat.
If you select âSelect dayâ, put a check mark for days of the week
to be set and press l(
).
Store Holidays
Check Schedule Events
You can store up to 100 holidays. However, you cannot store multiple
holidays for the same date.
Convenient Functions
mStationerySchedulei(
)Settings
Set holidayNewDo the following operations.
Date setting
Select an item.
Yearly [fixed date]. . . . . Enter the date.
Yearly [- - - - - -, - - -] . . . Enter the month, week, and day of the
week.
Holiday name
Enter a holiday name.
You can enter up to 10 full-pitch/20 half-pitch characters.
Press l(
You can check the details of schedule events and holidays. You can
check birthdays stored in the Phonebook as well.
mStationerySchedule
Select a date.
The Calendar display is shown.
If you press m(
) or c(
), the calendar
for the pervious or next month is displayed.
If you receive a weather forecast for a week from
i-concier, its information is also displayed.
).
Information
Holidays stored at purchase on the calendar are conformance with âLaw on National
Holidays and the partially amended version of the Elder Lawâ (up to No.43, 2005).
Spring Equinox Day and Autumn Equinox Day are announced on the official gazette
of February 1 in the previous year, therefore, they may differ from the days on the
calendar. (As of April 2009)
Calendar display
The list of schedule events and birthdays for the selected
date is displayed.
For the schedule events set to be repeated, up to 30
schedule events are displayed backward from the
current day.
Schedule list
380
3
Select a schedule event or birthday.
Settings
When you select a birthday and select âSending mailâ,
you can compose an i-mode mail message to the first
mail address in the Phonebook entry. (See âMail To
Functionâ on page 196)
When you select âCallingâ, you can make a call to the
first phone number in the Phonebook entry. (See
âPhone To/AV Phone To Functionâ on page 195)
Kisekae setting
You can change the design of the Calendar display.
Select a pattern.
Customize holiday
You can specify the color for the day of the week.
Select a day of the weekDefault, Red, or Blue
The display color of holidays has priority over the setting
of this function.
Set holiday
Detailed Schedule
display
Function Menu of the Calendar Display
New
Go to step 1 of âStore Holidaysâ on page 380.
Delete this
YES
Reset holiday
You can restore the holidays to its default.
YES
Enter the date.
Filter
You can list up schedule events by the specified icon.
Select an icon to be listedl(
Release filter
You can release filter and display all the schedule events.
Connect to Center
Set desktop/
Delete past
You can delete the schedule events stored for up to a
preceding day of the selected day.
YES
Delete all
You can delete all the schedule events. While schedule
events are displayed by Filter function, only the displayed
schedule events are deleted.
Enter your Terminal Security CodeYES
See page 124.
key
Add desktop icon
long press set.
See page 30.
See page 386.
transmission
Send all Ir data
transmission
No. of schedules
See page 361.
See page 363.
You can display the number of schedule events,
i-schedule events, birthdays, and holidays. In Secret Mode
or Secret Data Only, you can also display the number of
the schedule events stored as secret.
Information
The setting of this function is reflected to the calendar of the Stand-by display.
However, days are displayed in the default color during Lock All, Omakase Lock, and
Personal Data Lock.
The schedule events downloaded from i-concier are not deleted.
381
Convenient Functions
Delete
To specified date
All
Go to step 1 of âStore Holidaysâ on page 380.
Edit
Go to step 1 on page 379.
Search/Filter
Ir/
New
Function Menu of the Schedule List/Detailed Schedule
Display
New
Go to step 1 on page 379.
Convenient Functions
Copy
Go to step 1 on page 379.
You can edit also by pressing m(
).
When you edit a schedule event set with repetition, the
confirmation display appears asking whether to edit the
schedule event of the current day only. If you select
âYESâ, âRepeatâ on the edit display changes to â1 timeâ
(OFF), and a new schedule event is stored. If you select
âNOâ, the old schedule event is overwritten.
You can copy the schedule event and store it for another
date.
Enter the date and time you are pasting to.
Go to step 1 on page 379.
If you copy a schedule event set with repetition, âRepeatâ
on the edit display changes to â1 timeâ (OFF).
Compose message
Compose message
Attach to mail
You can compose an i-mode mail message whose text
contains the start date/time and details of the schedule
event.
Go to step 2 on page 130.
You can attach the schedule event to an i-mode mail
message to send.
Go to step 2 on page 130.
You can attach it to an i-mode mail message also by
pressing c(
) or l(
).
Move/copy
Copy to microSD
See page 346.
Connect to Center
See page 124.
Search/Filter
To specified date
382
See page 381.
See page 381.
Release filter
See page 381.
Set holiday
Edit
Edit
Filter
New
Go to step 1 of âStore Holidaysâ on page 380.
Edit
Go to step 1 of âStore Holidaysâ on page 380.
Delete this
YES
Reset holiday
Set desktop/
Add desktop icon
long press set.
Ir/
See page 381.
key
See page 30.
See page 386.
transmission
Send Ir data
Send
See page 360.
Send all
See page 361.
transmission
Send
See page 362.
Send all
See page 363.
Delete
Delete this
YES
If you delete a schedule set event with repetition, all the
data for repetition is deleted.
Delete select
Put a check mark for schedule events to be deleted
l(
)YES
Delete past
See page 381.
Delete all
See page 381.
Set secret/
Release secret
You can set/release secret for/from the schedule event.
YES
When you select âSet secretâ in ordinary mode (not in
âSecret modeâ or âSecret data onlyâ), enter your Terminal
Security Code.
Function Menu of the i-schedule List/Detailed i-schedule
Display
Schedule list
Information
The schedule events downloaded from i-concier are not deleted.
Delete
Displaying i-schedule
You can display contents of the schedule downloaded by i-concier.
You can display the schedule list stored in the i-schedule
event. (See page 380)
You can display the schedule list also by pressing
l(
), or by selecting âTo this i-schedule detailsâ
from the detailed i-schedule display.
Calendar display/Schedule list
l(
YES
Delete select
[i-schedule list only]
Put a check mark for i-schedule events to be deleted
l(
)YES
Delete all
[i-schedule list only]
Enter your Terminal Security CodeYES
Convenient Functions
The i-schedule list is displayed.
See âSearch by i-modeâ on page 193 when you select
âTo i-schedule listâ.
Delete this
[i-schedule list only]
i-schedule list
Select an i-schedule item.
Detailed i-schedule
display
383
+m-9-5
Using ToDo to Manage Schedule
You can manage your schedule events in the list and make an alarm tone
sound when the specified time comes.
You can store up to 100 ToDo items to manage your schedule.
See page 378 for how alarm works.
mStationeryToDol(
Do the following operations.
Convenient Functions
You can check the stored contents by selecting a stored ToDo item, and you can
edit it by pressing Oo(
).
Edit ToDo
Enter ToDo contents.
You can enter up to 100 full-pitch/200 half-pitch characters.
Due date
Select an item.
Enter date . . . . .Enter the date (due date) directly.
Choose date . . .Select a date (due date) from the calendar.
Check the date and press Oo(
).
No date. . . . . . . .Does not set the date (due date). The alarm
does not work.
Priority
Select a priority.
If you sort the items in due date order, the items for the same
due date are displayed from the higher priority.
Category
Select a category.
Alarm
Select an alarm method.
ON. . . . . . . . . . . .Alerts you at the set time. The setting for alarm
notification is completed.
ON/Set time . . . .Alerts you at the time set as the prenotification.
OFF. . . . . . . . . . .Does not alert you. The setting for alarm
notification is completed.
Enter the date and time to be alerted.
Alarm tone
384
Select a type of alarm toneSelect a folder
Select an alarm tone.
Press l(
).
: Priority high
: Priority low
If you do not enter the ToDo contents, â
store the ToDo item.
â is not displayed, and you cannot
Function Menu while ToDo Item is Displayed
New
Go to step 1 of âUsing ToDo to Manage Scheduleâ on
page 384.
Edit
Go to step 1 of âUsing ToDo to Manage Scheduleâ on
page 384.
To edit âCompletion dateâ of the ToDo item with its âChange
statusâ set to âCompletionâ, select â
â, and perform the
same operation as in âDue dateâ on page 384.
Change status
The set status icons are displayed on the ToDo list.
Select a status.
The status icons switch from blue to red after the due date.
If you select âCompletionâ, perform the same operation as in
âDue dateâ on page 384.
Category display
Select a category.
Select a ToDo item to display the details of it.
Sort/Filter
You can sort ToDo items for display. You can also list them up
by the specified status.
Select the order or state you want to display.
Set desktop/
key
Add desktop icon
See page 30.
long press set. See page 386.
Attach to mail
You can attach the ToDo item to an i-mode mail message to
send.
Go to step 2 on page 130.
You can attach it to an i-mode mail message also by
pressing l(
) while checking the stored contents of
the ToDo item.
Send Ir data
See page 360.
Send all Ir data
See page 361.
transmission
All
transmission
See page 362.
See page 363.
Copy to microSD
See page 346.
Delete this
YES
Delete select
Put a check mark for ToDo items to be deleted
l(
)YES
Delete completed
You can delete the âCompletionâ ToDo items.
YES
Delete all
Enter your Terminal Security CodeYES
Using Your Original Menu
You can store frequently used functions in the Private menu. You can
store a total of 12 items from respective functions in Main Menu (see
page 448).
Select a Function from the Private Menu
mm(
Private menu is displayed.
If you have not touched any key for at least 15 seconds,
the Stand-by display returns.
Information
Setting Operating Conditions of Alarm
You can set whether to sound an alarm of âAlarmâ, âScheduleâ, âToDoâ
and âTV timerâ, for when operating another function.
mSet./ServiceClockAlarm setting
Operation preferred or Alarm preferred
Operation preferred. . . . . Alerts you only during the Stand-by display.
Alarm preferred . . . . . . . . Alerts you even when you are operating the FOMA
terminal or during a call.
Private menu
Select an icon.
The display for the selected function is displayed.
Display the Private Menu List
Private menui(
+m-5-2
Information
When you could not be alerted, the âMissed alarmâ icon appears on the desktop.
Private Menu list
385
Convenient Functions
During standby, the alarm tone sounds at the level set for âPhoneâ of âRing volumeâ.
During a call, the alarm tone sounds at the level set for âVolumeâ (earpiece volume).
Function Menu of the Private Menu List
Add to menu
You can store the frequently used function in the Private
menu.
Select a function to be stored.
Press No to display the storable functions by main menu
item or sub-menu item. Press Bo to highlight the function
you store.
Change BG image
Set desktop/
Select a folderSelect an image.
key
Add desktop icon
See page 30.
Convenient Functions
long press set. See page 386.
Reset menu
You can reset the Private menu to the default.
YES
Release this
YES
Release all
YES
Information
The image you can set is a JPEG or GIF image whose size is Stand-by display (480 x
854) or smaller and up to 500 Kbytes. Perform âChange sizeâ or âTrim awayâ for other
images to set. However, when you set a GIF animation, the first frame is displayed.
386
Storing Frequently Used Function for Multi
Key
You can store frequently-used functions and phone numbers for
â long press set.â. You can call up the stored function by pressing and
holding x for at least one second from the Stand-by display.
mSet./ServiceOther settings long press set.
Select an item.
or
Select â long press set.â from the Function menu of
the item to be storedYES
The previously stored setting is overwritten.
If the addresses of the sender and another recipient of simultaneous mail are
found or the multiple destination addresses are found when you operate from the
Function menu of the detailed mail display, select a mail address or phone
number to be stored.
When you store âPicture folder jumpâ, you can show the Still Image list of the
storage location folder of the camera.
Information
While another menu function is activated, the display for the item set by this function
does not appear by pressing and holding -x for at least one second from the
Stand-by display, but the display for the activated menu function appears.
If this function is set to âOFFâ, the confirmation display appears asking whether to
store a function when you press and hold -x for at least one second from the
Stand-by display.
When the original data is deleted or overwritten, Multi Key Long Press Setting is
disabled. (Except phone numbers, mail addresses, and URLs)
+m-0
Storing Your Name, Mail Address and
Other Information
In addition to the phone number (own number) you have signed up, you
can store your personal information such as your name, reading of your
name, phone numbers (up to three), mail addresses (up to three), a postal
address, location information, a birthday, memorandums, and a still
image.
If you change the mail address or register a secret code, change the mail
address in this function as well.
mPhonebookOwn numberl(
Enter your Terminal Security Code.
Go to step 1 on page 387.
Change font size
You can switch font sizes for Own Number and âPhonebook
settingsâ, etc. (See âPhonebookâ on page 109)
Display all data
You can display all the stored phone numbers and mail
addresses.
Enter your Terminal Security Code.
Use Mo to display each item.
Copy name
You can copy a name.
).
Information
The items other than own number are displayed even if you use another UIM,
because they are stored in the FOMA terminal.
The mail address you can change using this function is limited to the mail address
displayed by âOwn numberâ. You cannot change the actual mail address.
Copy phone number/ You can copy each item.
Copy mail add./
From the Own Number display, press Mo to highlight an item to
Copy address/
be copied. The displayed Function menu items differ depending
Copy location info/ on the highlighted item.
Copy birthday/
Copy memorandums
Send Ir data
transmission
See page 360.
You can send data via infrared communication also by pressing
c(
).
See page 362.
You can send data via iC transmission also by pressing
m(
).
Copy to microSD
See page 346.
Erase phone
number/
Erase mail add./
Erase address/
Delete loc. info/
Erase birthday/
Erase memorandums/
Delete image
You can delete each item.
YES
When the display for entering your Terminal Security Code
appears, enter the code.
From the Own Number display, press Mo to highlight an item to
be deleted. The displayed Function menu items differ
depending on the highlighted item.
387
Convenient Functions
Function Menu of the Own Number Display
Edit
Perform the operation in
step 2 on page 78 to store
personal information.
You cannot change or
delete own number.
When you store the first
mail address, you can
select either âAuto inputâ
Own Number display
to automatically enter or
âDirect inputâ to directly enter that mail address. When you select âAuto inputâ,
i-mode access starts and your contracted mail address is automatically entered.
When you store the location information, select âFrom phonebookâ to store it by
selecting a Phonebook entry.
If you have already entered your Terminal Security Code by operating another
function such as âDisplay all dataâ, the display for entering your Terminal Security
Code does not appear.
Press l(
Information
When â2in1 settingâ is activated and you execute âAuto inputâ to obtain the first mail
address, both Address A and Address B are entered as the 1st addresses
respectively.
Reset
You can reset (delete) all the stored personal data such as phone
numbers or mail addresses except own number.
YES
When the display for entering your Terminal Security Code
appears, enter the code.
+m-5-5
Record Your Voice during Standby
mLifeKitRec. msg/voice memoVoice memo
YES
A beep sounds and recording starts. Speak into the microphone.
To suspend the recording midway, press Oo(
), r or h.
A beep sounds about five seconds before the recording time (for about three
minutes) ends. The beep sounds twice when the recording ends and the former
display returns.
Auto acquire No. B You can check if the 2in1 service is contracted. When it has been
contracted, Number B is stored.
Convenient Functions
Recording Voice during a Call or Standby
as Voice Memo
Two types of Voice Memo are available; one is âVoice memoâ (during a
call) for recording the other partyâs voice during a call and the other is
âRecord voice memoâ for recording your own voice during standby.
You can record either one of âVoice memoâ (during a call) or âVoice
memoâ for about three minutes.
See page 70 for playing back/erasing âVoice memoâ (during a call) or âVoice memoâ.
Record Other Partyâs Voice during a Call
During a voice call
>(for at least one second) or l(
A beep sounds and recording starts.
To suspend the recording midway, press Oo(
) or r, or press and hold
>(for at least one second).
Press h to end the recording and the call.
A beep sounds about five seconds before the recording time (for about three
minutes) ends.
The beep sounds twice when the recording ends and the âTalkingâ display
returns.
Information
If you record a voice memo when either âVoice memoâ (during a call) or âVoice memoâ
has already been saved, the old one is overwritten regardless of whether you have
played back or not.
You cannot record a voice memo while operating each item in the Function menu.
388
Information
The recording is suspended when a call comes in, when an alarm for âAlarmâ,
âScheduleâ, âToDoâ, âTV timerâ, or âTimer recordingâ sounds, or when you switch the
displays by Multitask.
Recording Images during a Videophone
Call as a Movie Memo
During a videophone call, you can record the receiving images along
with voice.
You can record up to five items for about 20 seconds per item.
See page 70 for playing back/erasing âMovie memoâ.
During a videophone call>(for at least one second)
A beep sounds and recording starts. â
â is displayed during recording.
A still image specified by âMovie memoâ of âSelect imageâ is shown on the other
partyâs display.
To suspend the recording midway, press Oo(
) or press and hold >(for
at least one second).
Press h to end the recording and the call.
A beep sounds about 5 seconds before the recording time (for about 20 seconds)
ends. The beep sounds twice when the recording ends and the âTalkingâ display
returns.
Information
If you record a movie memo when five movie memos have already been recorded, the
oldest movie memo is overwritten regardless of whether you have played it back or not.
You cannot record a movie memo while operating each item in the Function menu.
Calls reset
Displays the date and time when Reset Total Duration was executed last time.
Cost reset
Displays the date and time when Reset Total Cost was executed last time.
+m-6-1
Checking Call Duration/Charge
You can confirm the last and accumulated call duration and cost for
voice calls and videophone calls.
Displayed call duration and cost are for reference and might differ from the actual ones.
In addition, the consumption tax is not included in the call cost.
Both the voice call duration and digital communications duration (videophone call
duration + 64K data communication duration) are displayed and both incoming and
outgoing calls are included in the duration.
The call cost is for the outgoing calls only. However, âÂĽ0â or âÂĽďźďźâ is displayed for toll
free calls such as Free Dial or for Directory Assistance Service (104), etc.
The call cost is accumulated on the UIM. Therefore, when you replace the UIM, the
charge accumulated on the UIM in use is displayed. (accumulation from December
2004)
You can reset the displayed call duration and call cost.
mSet./ServiceCall time/costCall data
Last call duration
Talk: Displays the call duration of the latest voice call.
Digital Videophone: Displays the call duration of the latest videophone call.
Non-limiting digital: Displays the call duration of the latest 64K data
communication.
Last call cost
Talk: Displays the call cost for the latest voice call.
Digital Videophone: Displays the call cost for the latest videophone call.
Non-limiting digital: Displays the call cost for the latest 64K data communication.
Total calls duration
Talk: Displays the call duration of voice calls from the time Reset Total Duration
was executed to the current time.
Digital: Displays the call duration of videophone calls and 64K data
communication from the time Reset Total Duration was executed to the
current time.
Total calls
Displays the call cost from the time Reset Total Cost was executed to the current
call.
+m-6-0
Resetting Total Duration/Total Cost
mSet./ServiceCall time/cost
Reset total cost&dura.
Enter your Terminal Security Code
Do the following operations.
Reset total duration You can reset Last Call Duration and Total Calls Duration to â0 sâ.
YES
Reset total cost
You can reset Last Call Cost and Total Calls to âÂĽ0â.
YESEnter the PIN2 code.
See page 112 for PIN2 code.
389
Convenient Functions
Information
When Last Call Duration exceeds â19 hours 59 minutes 59 secondsâ, or Total Calls
Duration exceeds â199 hours 59 minutes 59 secondsâ, â0 sâ returns to re-count the
time.
If you switch between the voice call and videophone call during a call, the call duration
and call cost are counted respectively for the calls. You are not charged while
âChangingâ (see page 51) is displayed.
The duration/charge for i-mode communication and packet communication are not
counted. For how to check the i-mode fee, refer to âMobile Phone Userâs Guide
[i-mode] FOMA versionâ which is supplied on your i-mode contract.
The charge for Chaku-moji is not counted.
The international call fee for using WORLD CALL is counted. The fees for using other
international call services are not counted.
The duration for ringing and calling is not counted as call duration.
If you turn off the power or remove the UIM, Last Call Duration is reset to â0 sâ; and
Last Call Cost is reset to âÂĽďźďźâ.
Setting Call Cost Limit
You can set the call cost limit for Total Calls and can be notified when it is
exceeded. If you set âAuto reset settingâ to âONâ, the call cost is reset at
midnight on the 1st of the month and â â is deleted.
mSet./ServiceCall time/costNotice call cost
Enter your Terminal Security CodeON or OFF
Enter a max cost.
Using Calculator
You can display the calculator to make the four rules of calculation
(ďź, â, Ă, á). You can display up to 10 digits.
You can set from ÂĽ10 through ÂĽ100,000 in unit of ÂĽ10.
Select a method to alertON or OFF
Enter the PIN2 code.
See page 112 for PIN2 code.
Convenient Functions
+m-8-5
When Total Calls has exceeded the max cost
â â appears. When âIcon + alarmâ is set as a notice method and the Stand-by display
returns, the message to the effect that the call cost has exceeded the maximum cost is
displayed, and a warning tone sounds from the speakers.
mStationeryCalculator
Follow the operation below to make a
calculation.
*Vo
ďź
*Zo
*Co
â
*Xo
á
*Oo
ďź
+l
Decimal point
+i
-r
C (Clear): Clears the numeral you have
entered last.
Ă
AC (All clear): Clears all the calculations
you entered.
Information
Clear Max Cost Icon
You can clear â
â displayed by Notice Call Cost.
mSet./ServiceCall time/costCLR max cost icon
Enter your Terminal Security Code.
Information
â â is cleared also by executing Reset Total Cost, Reset Settings, or Initialize.
To be re-notified of the set limit after the maximum cost is exceeded, reset Total Calls.
You cannot enter a minus sign while you are performing calculation.
When the calculated result exceeds 10 digits or invalid calculation like âdivided by 0â is
performed, â.Eâ is displayed.
+m-4-2
Making Text Memos
You can store up to 20 text memos.
mStationeryText memoSelect
Enter a text memo.
You can enter up to 256 full-pitch/512 half-pitch characters.
You can check the stored contents by selecting a stored text memo, and you can
edit it by pressing Oo(
).
390
Function Menu while Text Memo is Displayed
Edit
Go to step 1 of âMaking Text Memosâ on page 390.
Compose message
You can compose an i-mode mail message containing the
contents of the text memo.
Go to step 2 on page 130.
You can compose it also by pressing l(
).
Edit schedule
Set desktop/
You can create a schedule event containing the contents of
the text memo.
Go to step 1 on page 379.
key
Add desktop icon
See page 30.
Copying/Deleting Data Items between
FOMA Terminal and UIM
You can exchange the Phonebook entries or SMS messages between the
FOMA terminal and the UIM. You can also delete the Phonebook entries
or SMS messages stored in the FOMA terminal or the UIM.
You can save a total of 20 received and sent SMS messages to the UIM.
Copy/Delete Data Items
mPhonebookUIM operation
Enter your Terminal Security Code.
long press set. See page 386.
See page 360.
Send all Ir data
See page 361.
transmission
All
transmission
See page 362.
See page 363.
Copy to microSD
See page 346.
Text memo info
You can display the date and time when the text memo was
created, the date and time of the latest update, and the
category.
Category
You can classify text memos by category.
Select a category.
If you do not set, the category is set to âNoneâ.
Delete this
YES
Delete selected
Put a check mark for text memos to be deleted
l(
)YES
Delete all
Enter your Terminal Security CodeYES
When you enter your Terminal Security Code, â
â appears, and you cannot use
phone and mail functions.
When a call comes in just before entering your Terminal Security Code, UIM
Operation ends.
Copy or DeleteSelect a copy end or delete source
Phonebook or SMS
Phonebook
Search the Phonebook to list the entries.
SMS
Inbox . . . . Copies or deletes the data in the Inbox.
Outbox. . . Copies or deletes the data in the Outbox.
Select a folder and show the list.
When copying or moving data items to the UIM, the confirmation display appears
telling that 2in1 management information will be deleted if 2in1 is activated.
Put a check mark for data items to be copied or deleted
l(
)YES
391
Convenient Functions
Send Ir data
Convenient Functions
Function Menu while the Phonebook List or SMS List is
Displayed
Start copy/
Start deletion
You can start copy or deletion.
Select this
You can select the data item.
Select all in tab
You can select all the Phonebook entries in the displayed tab.
Select all
You can select all data items.
Release this
You can release the selection.
Release all in tab
You can release all the selected Phonebook entries in the
displayed tab.
Release all
You can release all selections.
Detail
You can display the detailed Phonebook display or the detailed
SMS display.
Copy from the Function Menu of Phonebook
Detailed Phonebook displayi(
)Move/copy
Copy to UIM or Copy to phoneYES
Move or Copy from the Function Menu of Mail
Outbox list/Detailed Sent Mail display/Inbox list/
Detailed Received Mail displayi(
Move/copyUIM operation
Select a move method or copy methodYES
â
â
(blue)â indicates an SMS message in the FOMA terminal.
â indicates an SMS message on the UIM.
Information
The number of phone numbers/mail addresses you can store in a single Phonebook
entry differs between the FOMA terminal and the UIM. Therefore, you cannot copy
the second or later phone numbers/mail addresses stored in the FOMA terminal to
the UIM. You cannot copy the data that cannot be stored on the UIM such as a postal
address, either.
392
Information
When you copy Phonebook entries from the FOMA terminal to the UIM, the name of
up to 10 full-pitch/21 half-pitch characters and the reading of up to 12 half-pitch
characters are converted to full-pitch katakana characters and copied. The rest
characters are not copied.
Phonebook entries stored as secret data cannot be copied to the UIM even in Secret
Mode or Secret Data Only.
If you set the same group name in the FOMA terminal and the UIM, the group settings
for the Phonebook are retained. If you set different group names in the FOMA terminal
and the UIM, the group settings are not retained.
You can neither move nor copy SMS reports.
You cannot protect SMS messages you have moved or copied to the UIM. If you copy
or move protected SMS messages to the UIM, SMS messages on the UIM are
unprotected. Also, the reply and forward icons become the read icons.
If SMS messages are moved or copied from the FOMA terminal to the UIM, you can
check them in the âInboxâ or âOutboxâ folder.
While you use 2in1, all the SMS messages are saved as the ones for Number A,
regardless of the current mode.
When you move or copy SMS messages from the UIM to the FOMA terminal, they
are moved or copied to the âInboxâ or âOutboxâ folder.
How to Use Earphone/Microphone with
Switch
You can make/receive calls by using the Stereo Earphone Set 01 (option).
You can use the optional Earphone/Microphone 01, Earphone/Microphone with Switch
P001/P002, Stereo Earphone Set P001, Flat-plug Earphone/Microphone with Switch
P01/P02, and Flat-plug Stereo Earphone Set P01 in the same operation.
Connect Earphone/Microphone with Switch
Open the cover of the connector terminal and insert the connecting plug
of the Stereo Earphone Set 01. (See page 22)
Selecting a Microphone for Use when an
Earphone is Connected
Receive Calls Using the Switch
During ringing
Press the switch of the Stereo Earphone Set.
A beep sounds and you are connected.
With a videophone call, the substitute image is sent to the other party. You can
switch between the substitute image and the image through your camera by
pressing m during the videophone call. (See page 72)
You can use the switch also with the FOMA terminal closed.
You can answer calls also by operating the FOMA terminal.
When âAuto answer settingâ is set to âONâ, a call is answered automatically after
the ring time elapses.
For when the Stereo Earphone Set 01 (option) is connected, you can
select which microphone you use between the microphone of the FOMA
terminal and of the earphone/microphone.
mSet./ServiceOther settings
Headset mic. setting
Built-in microphone or Headset microphone
Information
Make Calls Using the Switch
Enter a phone number
or
call up a Phonebook entry, redial item, dialed call record,
or received call record.
Press and hold the switch of the Stereo Earphone Set for
at least one second
Start talking when the other party answers.
A beep sounds and you are connected.
You cannot make a videophone call by pressing the switch of the Stereo
Earphone Set.
You can make a call also by operating the FOMA terminal.
After talking, press and hold the switch of the Stereo
Earphone Set for at least one second to end the call.
A beep sounds twice and you are disconnected.
Information
Regardless of the setting for âKeypad soundâ, a tone for connecting and disconnecting
the line sounds.
Note that you might receive a call if you connect the Stereo Earphone Set after the
ring tone sounds.
By pressing the switch of the Stereo Earphone Set during answer-hold (On Hold) or
while a call is on hold (Holding), you can release the hold. (While a videophone call is
put on hold, the substitute image is sent and the videophone call starts.)
Do not press and release the switch of the Stereo Earphone Set in succession. You
might automatically receive a call.
If you have signed up for Call Waiting Service and âMulti callingâ is displayed during a
call, you can switch two calls by pressing and holding the switch of the Stereo
Earphone Set for at least one second. However, you cannot use the switch to end the
call.
You can adjust the earpiece volume by pressing .< (raise) or .> (lower) during a call.
After talking, press and hold the switch of the Stereo
Earphone Set for at least one second to end the call.
A beep sounds twice and you are disconnected.
393
Convenient Functions
When you connect earphones without a microphone, select âBuilt-in microphoneâ.
When you connect the Stereo Earphone Set while âBuilt-in microphoneâ is set, the
sensitivity of the microphone of the FOMA terminal is improved.
Selecting Other Party to Call for when an
Earphone is Connected
Receiving a Call Automatically when an
Earphone is Connected
When âHeadset switch to callâ is set to âVoice callâ and the Stand-by
display is shown, you can make a voice call by pressing the switch of the
Stereo Earphone Set 01 (option).
mSet./ServiceIncoming callAuto call/answer set.
Headset switch to callVoice call or OFF
You can check the currently set phonebook entry by pressing l(
).
Search the PhonebookSelect a Phonebook entry.
If a call comes in while the Stereo Earphone Set 01 (option) is connected,
the FOMA terminal automatically answers the call after the specified ring
time elapses.
mSet./ServiceIncoming callAuto call/answer set.
Auto answer settingON or OFF
Enter a ring time (seconds).
Enter from â001â through â120â in three digits.
You cannot set the same ring time for Auto Answer Setting and Record Message
Setting. Set a different time for each.
Convenient Functions
Information
You can set it only for a Phonebook entry in the FOMA terminal (Phone).
When the Phonebook entry contains multiple phone numbers, the first phone number
is set.
If you delete the set Phonebook entry, the Phonebook entry stored in the memory
number 999 is automatically set to Headset Switch to Call.
394
Information
When the FOMA terminal automatically answers a videophone call, a substitute
image is sent to the other party. You can switch between the substitute image and the
camera image by pressing +m during the videophone call. (See page 72)
If you activate Voice Mail Service or Call Forwarding Service together with Auto
Answer Setting and want to give priority to Auto Answer Setting over the service, set
its ring time shorter than that for Voice Mail Service or Call Forwarding Service.
Even if you connect the Stereo Earphone Set while the FOMA terminal is ringing,
Auto Answer Setting does not work. However, if you disconnect it while it is ringing,
Auto Answer Setting works.
During 64K data communication, Auto Answer Setting does not work.
Using Bluetooth Function
You can connect between Bluetooth devices wirelessly. When you
connect, for an example, your FOMA terminal to Wireless Earphone Set
02 (option) using Bluetooth communication, you can talk on the phone or
listen to music with your FOMA terminal carried in a bag.
Note that battery consumption will be faster when you use Bluetooth connection.
Wireless communications with all the Bluetooth devices are not necessarily
guaranteed.
What You can Do with Bluetooth Function
Supported version
Bluetooth Specification Ver. 2.0 + EDR compliantâť1
Supported profilesâť2 (Supported services)
HSP: Headset Profile
HFP: Hands-Free Profile
A2DP: Advanced Audio Distribution Profile
AVRCP: Audio/Video Remote Control Profile
DUNP: Dial-up Networking Profile
OPP: Object Push Profile
SPP: Serial Port Profile
â Talk through Headset
When you connect Wireless Earphone Set 02 (option) or a Bluetooth headset
(commercial item) to the FOMA terminal using Bluetooth communication, you can talk
wirelessly.
ăťUse the Headset service.
â Talk Hands-free
When you connect a Bluetooth communication device such as a car navigation
system (commercial item) to the FOMA terminal using Bluetooth communication, you
can communicate hands-free using the microphone and speaker on the car navigation
system.
ăťUse the Hands-free service.
â Play back on Audio Equipment
When you connect Wireless Earphone Set P01/02 (option) or Bluetooth
communication compatible audio equipment (commercial item) to the FOMA terminal
using Bluetooth communication, you can play back a stereophonic high-quality sound
wirelessly.
However, the devices that support audio of 1Seg programs or video files are limited.
(For details, see âInformationâ of âPlay Back Audio of 1Seg Programsâ on page 400.)
ăťUse the Audio service.
â Communicate wirelessly
When you connect a Bluetooth communication compatible personal computer to the
FOMA terminal using Bluetooth communication, you can perform packet
communication or 64K data communication using the FOMA terminal as a modem.
ăťUse the Dial-up Communication service.
ăťFor details, refer to the PDF version of âManual for PC Connectionâ.
â Send Phonebook via Bluetooth communication
You can send the Phonebook entries by connecting the Bluetooth device to the FOMA
terminal using Bluetooth communication. You can send them from the Function menu
of the Phonebook.
ăťUse the Object Push service.
â Use Bluetooth communication from i-Îąppli
By connecting the FOMA terminal with another mobile phone or Bluetooth
communication compatible device using Bluetooth communication, you can play a
match game with your friends or manage data files on an i-Îąppli program.
ăťUse the Serial Port service.
395
Convenient Functions
With your FOMA terminal, the following six services are available:
Headset, Hands-free, Audio, Dial-up Communication, Object Push and
Serial Port services. Also, the Audio/Video remote control service
(Ver.1.3) might be available when you use the Audio service. (Only with
compatible Bluetooth devices)
âť1 The FOMA terminal and all Bluetooth function-installed devices have ensured that
they conform to the Bluetooth Specification according to the rules the Bluetooth SIG
defines, and are all authenticated. However, operating methods might differ, or data
might not be exchanged even when they are connected wirelessly, depending on
the features or specifications of connecting devices.
âť2 Standardizes the connecting procedures of Bluetooth function per feature of a device.
â Tone from Bluetooth devices
Information
Refer to the instruction manual for a Bluetooth device as well.
Convenient Functions
Connected service
HSP
HFP
A2DP
Voice call dial tone
â
Voice/Videophone call ring tone
ââť1âť2
â
ââť2
â
Ringback tone at voice/videophone call
â
The other partyâs voice at voice/videophone call
â
â
Callerâs voice from Record Message at voice call
â
1Seg audio
â
i-motion playback tone
â
ââť4
Video playback tone
â
Movie playback tone
â
MUSIC Player playback tone
â
Music&Video Channel playback tone
Alarm preferred
ââť5
ââť5
â
ââť3
Operation preferred
âť6
âť6
âť6
Alarm preferred
ââť3
Operation preferred
âť6
âť6
âť6
Alarm tone
Mail ring tone
â: Output from the Bluetooth device.
: Not output from the Bluetooth device, instead it is played back from the FOMA
terminal.
âť1 The ring tone sounds from both the Bluetooth device and FOMA terminal when
âHeadset usage settingâ is set to âHeadset and speakerâ.
âť2 The ring tone sounds from the FOMA terminal when âForward ring toneâ is set to
âOFFâ.
âť3 The tone sounds from the Bluetooth device while you are playing back a music file,
a Music&Video Channel program, or a video file, or watching a 1Seg program.
âť4 The tone does not sound for i-motion files played back while being obtained from
sites.
âť5 The alarm tone sounds from the Bluetooth device only during a call. The alarm tone
that sounds from the Bluetooth device is not the one set for Alarm. It beeps.
âť6 The alarm tone/mail ring tone does not sound when a display other than the
Stand-by display is shown.
Some Bluetooth devices might not work as specified in the table above.
396
Notes on using Bluetooth devices
â Observe the following to make a good connection:
The distance between your mobile phone and another Bluetooth device must be
within 10 meters under line-of-sight conditions. The allowable connection distance
may be shorter, depending on the ambient environment (such as walls or furniture)
and the structure of a building. When there are any obstructions between the FOMA
terminal and Bluetooth device, the allowable connection distance may also be
shorter.
Particularly, if there is a wall or floor of reinforced concrete between them, they may
be unable to connect with each other. Above mentioned connection distance is not
guaranteed.
During connection, keep Bluetooth devices as possible as away from other electric
devices (such as home electric appliances, AV devices, OA devices). (The Bluetooth
device is liable to be adversely affected by a microwave oven so keep as possible as
away from the microwave oven.) Otherwise, normal connection cannot be performed
when electric devices are powered on or Bluetooth devices may cause noises or a
reception failure on a television or radio set (television images may degrade for
particular channels of UHF or satellite broadcasting).
If there is a broadcast station or radio near a Bluetooth device to which you want to
connect, your FOMA terminal may be unable to connect with the Bluetooth device. In
such a case, move the Bluetooth device to a place where connection is possible.
Strong radio waves may prevent connection between Bluetooth devices.
With a Bluetooth device put in your bag or pocket, you can make a wireless
connection. However, if the Bluetooth device and FOMA terminal is separated by
your body, communication speed might be lowered or noise could result.
â Radio interference with wireless LANs
Bluetooth devices use the same frequency band (2.4GHz) as wireless LANs
(IEEE802.11b/g). Therefore, if a Bluetooth device is used near a wireless LAN device,
radio interference may cause lowering of the communication speed, noise or
connection fail. In this case, take the following measures:
Keep your FOMA terminal and the wireless connection-target Bluetooth device away
from the wireless LAN device 10 meters or more.
When you use them within a distance of 10 meters, turn off the power to the wireless
LAN device.
â Radio waves generated from the Bluetooth device may possibly give an
adverse effect on electronic medical appliances.
As an accident could result in some cases, make sure that you turn off the power to
the FOMA terminal and Bluetooth devices in places as shown below:
ăťOn trains
ăťIn airplanes
ăťIn hospitals
ăťNearby automatic doors or fire alarms
ăťIn places such as gas stations where flammable gas is generated
Register Device
You can register a Bluetooth device to the FOMA terminal. You can
register up to 10 Bluetooth devices.
The Bluetooth devices around the FOMA terminal are searched. You need to place
the Bluetooth device to be registered on standby for registration beforehand.
Up to 20 searched devices are listed on the Device list.
You can search for Bluetooth devices also by pressing l(
) from the
Device list.
To cancel during search, press l(
).
Select a Bluetooth device to be registeredYES
When you register Wireless Earphone Set 02, go to step 4.
Select the text box for entering the
Bluetooth passkey
Enter the Bluetooth passkeySet
Select a service to be connected.
The Bluetooth device is connected and â (blue)â blinks.
When no communication with the Bluetooth device is
made for a certain period of time, your FOMA terminal is
Service Selection
placed in low power consumption mode, and â (black)â
display
stays on.
When you use the Bluetooth device which is able to connect multiple services,
the confirmation display appears asking whether to connect another service in
succession.
â
(blue)â is displayed during connection, â
(gray)â is displayed on standby
for connection next to the service name.
If you select âDial-upâ, the FOMA terminal is placed on standby for connection.
To disconnect, select the connected service and select âYESâ.
See âAccept Registeredâ on page 399 for how to cancel the service on standby.
Information
When 10 Bluetooth devices have already been registered, the confirmation display
appears asking whether to overwrite them. When you select âYESâ, the Bluetooth
device that is not protected, not set for âPreferred deviceâ, and with the oldest
communication date/time, except in communicating or in standby state, is overwritten.
However, if you register by i-Îąppli Touch (see page 273), the confirmation display
does not appear and it is automatically overwritten.
You cannot activate Bluetooth function during Self Mode.
You can enter up to 16 half-pitch alphanumeric
characters.
For the Bluetooth passkey, refer to the instruction
manual for the Bluetooth device.
You do not need to enter the Bluetooth pass key
depending on the Bluetooth device. In this case, go to step 4.
397
Convenient Functions
mLifeKitBluetoothRegister New Devices
Information
Connect
You can connect the registered Bluetooth device to the FOMA terminal.
mLifeKitBluetoothDevice list
Select a Bluetooth device to be connected
Select a service to be connected.
See step 4 on page 397 for
details.
Device list
Convenient Functions
â Device list
Device class
: PC
Service Selection
display
: Phone
: Network device
: Audio device
: Peripheral device
: Imaging device
: Not detected
: Not registered
Protect
Displayed when the registered contents are protected.
Profile state
398
Font
color
Background
color
Frame
color
Blue
Gray
None
Function Menu of the Device List
Register devices
Go to step 3 on page 397.
Preferred device
You can set a Bluetooth device to be connected taking priority
over other devices when a call comes in. You can set this for
the Headset service compatible Bluetooth device only.
When you already set another Bluetooth device for
âPreferred deviceâ, that setting is canceled, and the selected
Bluetooth device is set for the priority device.
To release it, perform the same operation.
Protect/release
You can protect the registered Bluetooth device so that it is
not deleted or overwritten. You can protect up to five devices.
To release it, perform the same operation.
Change device name
You can change the name of the registered Bluetooth device.
Enter a device name.
You can enter up to 16 full-pitch/32 half-pitch characters.
Delete
You can delete the registered Bluetooth device.
YES
Description
You can display the device name, Bluetooth address, device
class, and supported profile.
: Others
Device name
Device list
The name of Bluetooth device is displayed.
When no name is detected by search, the Bluetooth address is displayed.
Connecting status
: Being connected
: Not connected
Mark
When the Bluetooth device is turned off or when the Bluetooth device does not
respond while a connection is being established or being disconnected, it takes
maximum about 110 seconds for processing.
When your FOMA terminal is connected using the Headset service, Hands-free
service, Audio service, or Dial-up Communication service, and is disconnected from
the Bluetooth device, the FOMA terminal is placed on standby for connection. Also,
your FOMA terminal is placed on standby for connection the next time the power is
turned on after the FOMA terminal is turned off while it is connected or is on standby
for connection.
Status
Not connected (unregistered)
Blue
Gray
Blue
Not connected (registered)
White
Green
None
Being connected
Green
White
Green
Standby for connection
White
Light green
None
Preferred device
Gray
Gray
None
Not supported
Set desktop/
key
Add desktop icon
See page 30.
long press set. See page 386.
Information
Make a Call
When you select a registered Bluetooth device, the registered profile is updated.
(When the device name has been changed, it returns to the original device name.)
When you select a profile that is different from the registered one, the profile is
additionally registered.
Even when Preferred Device is set, you cannot connect that device unless the Headset
service is placed on standby for connection. When other Bluetooth device is connected
with the Headset service, the Bluetooth device that is being connected has priority.